Precaution During Programming

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 300

High−level Instructions

Precaution during programming


Even if D+1 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.

3 − 636

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F271 (DMAX) Maximum value search in 32-bit data table


P271(PDMAX)
Outline Searches for a maximum value in a table of 32-bit areas.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P271
(PDMAX)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F271 (DMAX)
R0
DT 10
10 F271 DMAX, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20

S1 S2 D DT 30

S1 Starting 16-bit area of 32-bit data table


S2 Ending 16-bit area of double word (32-bit)
D Starting 16-bit area for storing maximum value and relative address (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
This instruction searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected
with S1 and the area selected with S2, and stores it in the area selected with D. The address relative to S1 is
stored in D+2.

Double word data table


S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Maximum value
S1+1: Higher word D+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2: Lower word n


S2+1: Higher word Relative address

3 − 637

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of double word data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.

Double word data table


S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Higher word Higher word
Maximum value
S1+1: D+1:
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word Relative address

If there are several values which are a maximum value, the relative address of the first value found searching
from S1 is stored in D+2.

Precaution during programming


Even if D+2 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.

3 − 638

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F272 (MIN) Minimum value search in 16-bit data table


P272 (PMIN)
Outline Searches for a minimum value in a table of 16-bit areas.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P272
(PMIN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F272 (MIN)
R0
DT 10
10 F272 MIN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20

S1 S2 D DT 30

S1 Starting 16-bit area of data table


S2 Ending 16-bit area of data table
D Starting 16-bit area for storing minimum value and relative address (2 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
This instruction searches for the minimum value in the 16-bit data table between the area selected with S1
and the area selected with S2, and stores it in the area selected with D. The address relative to S1 is stored in
D+1.
Word data table
S1: 0 D: Minimum value
S1+1: 1 D+1: Relative address
2
3
4

S2: n
Relative address
If there are several values which are a minimum value, the relative address of the first value found searching
from S1 is stored in D+1.

3 − 639

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precaution during programming


Even if D+1 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.

3 − 640

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F273 (DMIN) Minimum value search in 32-bit data table


P273 (PDMIN)
Outline Searches for a minimum value in a table of 32-bit areas.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P273
(PDMIN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F273 (DMIN)
R0
DT 10
10 F273 DMIN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20

S1 S2 D DT 30

S1 Starting 16-bit area of 32-bit data table


S2 Ending 16-bit area of double word (32-bit)
D Starting 16-bit area for storing minimum value and relative address (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
This instruction searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with
S1 and the area selected with S2, and stores it in the area selected with D. The address relative to S1 is stored
in D+2.
Double word data table
S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Minimum value
S1+1: Higher word D+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2: Lower word n


S2+1: Higher word Relative address

3 − 641

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of double word data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.
Double word data table
S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Higher word Higher word
Minimum value
S1+1: D+1:
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word Relative address

If there are several values which are a minimum value, the relative address of the first value found searching
from S1 is stored in D+2.

Precaution during programming


Even if D+2 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.

3 − 642

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F275 (MEAN) Total and mean numbers calculation in 16-bit data table
P275(PMEAN)
Outline Calculates the total and mean numbers in the specified word data table.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P275
(PMEAN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST X 10
11 F275 (MEAN)
R10
DT 10
10 F275 MEAN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20

S1 S2 D DT 30

S1 Starting 16-bit area of data table


S2 Ending 16-bit area of data table
D Starting 16-bit for storing total and mean numbers (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
The total value and the average value of the word data (signed) from the area selected with S1 to the area
selected with S2 are obtained and stored in the area selected with D.
15 0
D Total (32 bits)
D+1
D+2 Mean (16 bits)

Decimals of the average value are rounded off so that the average value is an integer.

3 − 643

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precaution during programming


Even if D+2 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when overflows/underflows while calculating.

3 − 644

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F276 (DMEAN) Total and mean numbers calculation in 32-bit data table
P276(PDMEAN)
Outline Calculates the total and mean numbers in the specified double word
data table.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P276
(PDMEAN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F276 (DMEAN)
R0
DT 10
10 F276 DMEAN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20

S1 S2 D DT 30

S1 Starting 16-bit area of 32-bit data table


S2 Ending 16-bit area of double word (32-bit)
D Starting 16-bit area for storing total and mean numbers (5 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
The total value and the average value of the double word data (signed) from the area selected with S1 to the
area selected with S2 are obtained and stored in the area selected with D.
15 0
D Total (64 bits)
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+4 Mean (32 bits)
D+5

3 − 645

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of double word data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.
Double word data table
S1: Lower word 0
S1+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1
S1+3:
Specified areas

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word

Decimals of the average value are rounded off so that the average value is an integer.

Precaution during programming


Even if D + 5 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when overflows/underflows while calculating.

3 − 646

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F277 (SORT) Sort data in 16-bit data table


P277 (PSORT) (in smaller or larger number order)
Outline Sorts a string of data words.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P277
(PSORT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F277 (SORT)
R0
DT 10
10 F277 SORT, DT10, DT19, K0
DT 19

S1 S2 S3 K 0

S1 Starting 16-bit area of sort data


S2 Ending 16-bit area of sort data
S3 Constant or area where sort condition is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
When the S3 is “K0 (ascending order)” When the S3 is “K1 (descending order)”
DT10 K300 DT10 K−30 DT10 K300 DT10 K1000
11 K10 11 K−3 11 K10 11 K300
12 K3 12 K−1 12 K3 12 K100
13 K−1 13 K1 13 K−1 13 K30
14 K1000 14 K3 14 K1000 14 K10
15 K−30 15 K10 15 K−30 15 K3
16 K100 16 K30 16 K100 16 K1
17 K30 17 K100 17 K30 17 K−1
18 K1 18 K300 18 K1 18 K−3
19 K−3 19 K1000 19 K−3 19 K−30

3 − 647

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The data words (signed) from the area specified by S1 to the area specified by S2 are sorted in ascending
order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first) depending on the condition set
with S3.
If S1 = S2, sorting does not take place.
The sort condition is specified as follows in S3:
− K0: Ascending order
− K1: Descending order
Double sorting is used for the sorting method. Data is sorted from S1 to S2 in order following the sorting
procedure. Note that the number of word comparisons increases in proportion to the square of the number of
words, thus more time will be required for execution when there are a large number of words.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.

3 − 648

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F278 (DSORT) Sort data in 32-bit data table


P278 (PDSORT) (in smaller or larger number order)
Outline Sorts a string of data double words.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P278
(PDSORT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F278 (DSORT)
R0
DT 10
10 F278 DSORT, DT10, DT19, K0
DT 19
K 0
S1 S2 S3
S1 Starting 16-bit area of sort data (2 words)
S2 Ending 16-bit area of sort data (2 words)
S3 Constant or area where sort condition is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S2 N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
When the S3 is “K0 (ascending order)” When the S3 is “K1 (descending order)”
DT10, 11 K25000 DT10, 11 K−4000 DT10, 11 K25000 DT10, 11 K100000
12, 13 K−4000 12, 13 K−2600 12, 13 K−4000 12, 13 K25000
14, 15 K1500 14, 15 K1500 14, 15 K1500 14, 15 K1500
16, 17 K−2600 16, 17 K25000 16, 17 K−2600 16, 17 K−2600
18, 19 K100000 18, 19 K100000 18, 19 K100000 18, 19 K−4000

3 − 649

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The double data words (signed) from the area specified by S1 to the area specified by S2 are sorted in
ascending order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first) depending on the
condition set with S3.
If S1 = S2, sorting does not take place.
The sort condition is specified as follows in S3:
− K0: Ascending order
− K1: Descending order
Double sorting is used for the sorting method. Data is sorted from S1 to S2 in order following the sorting
procedure. Note that the number of word comparisons increases in proportion to the square of the number of
words, thus more time will be required for execution when there are a large number of words.
If S2 specifies a higher word of double word data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.
Double word data table
S1: Lower word 0
S1+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1
S1+3:
Specified areas

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.

3 − 650

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F282 (SCAL) Scaling of 16−bit data


P282 (PSCAL)
Outline The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling
for the given data table.
With the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the differential execution type instruction P282 (PSCAL) cannot
be specified.

Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

10 ST R 10
Trigger
11 F282 (SCAL)
DT 0
R10
DT 10
10 F282 SCAL, DT 0, DT 10, DT 120
DT 120

S S2 D

S1 16−bit data of the source corresponding to the input value X, or area storing data
S2 Starting address of data table used for scaling (linearization)
D Area where output result Y is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant
register Index
Operand
FL I modifier
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD K H f
(*1) (*2)
S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A
(*1) Cannot be specified with FP0R, FPΣ and FP−X. A: Available
N/A: Not Available
(*2) I0 to ID

Explanation of example
The output value Y for the input value X stored in DT0 is found by accessing the data table starting from DT10,
and the result is stored in DT120.

3 − 651

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The output value for the input value X is found by performing scaling according to the data table, where the
16−bit data designated in “S1” is designated in “S2”.
The number “n” of items in the data table is determined by the value “n” designated for the head “S2” of the
data table.

Configuration of the data table used for scaling


When S2 = DT10 and n = K10
S2: n DT10
S2+1: x1 DT11
S2+2: x2 DT12
S2+3: x3 DT13

S2+n−1: xn−1 DT19


S2+n: xn DT20
S2+n+1: y1 DT21
S2+n+2: y2 DT22
S2+n+3: y3 DT23

S2+2n−1: yn−1 DT29


S2+2n: yn DT30

Output value

(x4,y4) (xn−1,yn−1) (xn,yn)

Y=“D”

(x3,y3)

(x2,y2)
(x1,y1)
X=“S1”
Input value

Precautions during programming


Make xt greater than xt−1.
xt and yt should be created as 16−bit data to indicate which line is specified.
If X(S1) is a value smaller than x1, the value of Y(D) will be the value of y1.
If X(S1) is larger than xn, Y(D) will be the value of yn.
The maximum value of n is 99.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The specified range is exceeded when an index is modified.
− The n specified by “S2” is smaller than 2, or if the n is larger than 99
− The data table specified by “S2” exceeds the available area
− Xn are not in ascending order

3 − 652

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F283 (DSCAL) Scaling of 32−bit data


P283 (PDSCAL)
Outline The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling
for the given data table.
With the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the differential execution type instruction P283 (PDSCAL) cannot
be specified.

Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

10 ST R 10
Trigger
11 F283 (DSCAL)
DT 0
R10
DT 10
10 F283 DSCAL, DT 0, DT 10, DT 120
DT 120

S S2 D

S1 32−bit data of the source corresponding to the input value X, or area storing data
S2 Starting address of data table used for scaling (linearization)
D Area where output result Y is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant
register Index
Operand
FL I modifier
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD K H f
(*1) (*2)
S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A
(*1) Cannot be specified with FP0R, FPΣ and FP−X. A: Available
N/A: Not Available
(*2) I0 to ID

Explanation of example
The output value Y for the input value X stored in DT0 is found by accessing the data table starting from DT10,
and the result is stored in DT120 and DT121.

3 − 653

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The output value for the input value X is found by performing scaling according to the data table, where the
32−bit data designated in “S1” is designated in “S2”.
The number “n” of items in the data table is determined by the value “n” designated for the head “S2” of the
data table.

Configuration of the data table used for scaling


When S2 = DT10 and n = K10
S2: n+1 DT10
S2+1: DT11
x1
S2+2: DT12
S2+3: DT13
x2
S2+4: DT14

S2+2n−1: DT29
xn
S2+2n: DT30
S2+2n+1: DT31
y1
S2+2n+2: DT32
S2+2n+3: DT33
y2
S2+2n+4: DT34

S2+4n−1: DT49
yn
S2+4n: DT50

Output value

(x4,y4) (xn−1,yn−1) (xn,yn)

Y=“D”

(x3,y3)

(x2,y2)
(x1,y1)
X=“S1”
Input value

Precautions during programming


Make xt greater than xt−1.
xt and yt should be created as 32−bit data to indicate which line is specified.
If X(S1) is a value smaller than x1, the value of Y(D) will be the value of y1.
If X(S1) is larger than xn, Y(D) will be the value of yn.
The maximum value of n is 99.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The specified range is exceeded when an index is modified.
− The n specified by “S2” is smaller than 2, or if the n is larger than 99
− The data table specified by “S2” exceeds the available area
− Xn are not in ascending order

3 − 654

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


FP–e High−level Instructions

Availability
FP−X V2.0 or more

F284 (RAMP) Inclination output of 16−bit data FPΣ V3.10 or more


FP0R

Outline Executes the linear output according to the elapsed time from the start
by performing scaling with the output initial value, target value and time
range.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

10 ST R 0
Trigger
11 F284 (RAMP)
DT 0
R0
DT 1
10 F284 RAMP, DT0, DT 1, DT2, DT10
DT 2
DT 10
S1 S2 S3 D

S1 16−bit equivalent constant or 16−bit area for storing initial values


S2 16−bit equivalent constant or 16−bit area for storing target values
S3 16−bit equivalent constant or 16−bit area for storing time range
D Area where output result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant
register Index
Operand SWR SDT
In modifier
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD K H
(*1)
S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
N N/A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A
(*1) I0 to ID A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Operation
Executes the linear output according to the elapsed time from the start by performing scaling with the 16−bit
output initial value specified by S1, the 16−bit output target value specified by S2 and the 16−bit output time
range (ms unit) specified by S3.

Precautions during programming


Max. 1 scan time error in the output time range occurs occasionally.

3 − 655

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions FP–e

Explanation of example
When specifying each value as below by the program:

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− the area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− the output time range specified by ”S3” is smaller than k1 or larger than
k30000.

3 − 656

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F285 (LIMT) 16-bit data upper and lower limit control


P285 (PLIMT)
Outline This instruction carries out upper and lower limit control for 16-bit data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P285
(PLIMT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F285 (LIMT)
R0 DT 10
10 F285 LIMT, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D
DT 40

S1 The area where the lower limit is stored or the lower limit data.
S2 The area where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data.
S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data.
D The area where the output value is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

3 − 657

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The 16-bit output value stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not the 16-bit input
value specified by S3 falls within the range bounded by the upper and lower limits set in S2 and S1.
The output value is determined based on the following conditions:
− When the lower limit S1 is greater than the input value S3, the lower limit value S1 is stored in D as the
output value.
− When the upper limit S2 is less than the input value S3, the upper limit value S2 is stored in D as the
output value.
− When Lower limit S1 Input value S3 Upper limit S2, the input value S3 is stored in D as the
output value.
Output value D

Lower limit S1 [S2]

Input value S3

Upper limit S2
[S1]

To perform upper limit control only, set K−32768 (or H8000) for the lower limit S1.
To perform lower limit control only, set K32767 (or H7FFF) for the upper limit S2.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when the result of processing is between the upper and lower limits.

3 − 658

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F286 (DLIMT) 32-bit data upper and lower limit control


P286 (PDLIMT)
Outline This instruction carries out upper and lower limit control for 32-bit data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P286
(PDLIMT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F286 (DLIMT)
R0 DT 10
10 F286 DLIMT, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 The area where the lower limit is stored or the lower limit data. (2 words)
S2 The area where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data. (2 words)
S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data. (2 words)
D The area where the output value is stored. (2 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

3 − 659

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The output value (double words data) stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not
the input value (double words data) specified by S3 falls within the range bounded by the upper and lower
limits set in S2 and S1.
The output value is determined based on the following conditions:
− When the lower limits S1+1 and S1 are greater than the input value S3+1 and S3, the lower limit value
S1+1 and S1 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
− When the upper limits S2+1 and S2 are less than the input value S3+1 and S3, the upper limit value
S2+1 and S2 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
− When Lower limit S1+1 and S1 Input value S3+1 and S3 Upper limit S2+1 and S2, the input
value S3+1 and S3 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
Output value D+1 and D

Lower limit (S2+1, S2)


S1+1 and S1
Input value S3+1 and S3

Upper limit S2+1 and S2


(S1+1, S1)

To perform upper limit control only, set K−2147483648 (or H80000000) for the lower limit S1+1 and S1.
To perform lower limit control only, set K2147483647 (or H7FFFFFFF) for the upper limit S2+1 and S2.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when the result of processing is between the upper and lower limits.

3 − 660

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F287 (BAND) 16-bit data deadband control


P287 (PBAND)
Outline This instruction carries out dead-band control for 16-bit data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P287
(PBAND)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F287 (BAND)
R0 DT 10
10 F287 BAND, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 The area where the lower limit is stored or the lower limit data.
S2 The area where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data.
S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data.
D The area where the output value is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
When the DT10 is K−100 and DT20 is K100.
Value of DT30 Value of DT40
K−300 → K−200
K−200 → K−100
K−100 to K100 → K0
K200 → K100
K300 → K200

3 − 661

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The output value (word data) stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not the input
value (word data) specified by S3 falls within the dead-band bounded by the upper and lower limits set in S1
and S2.
The output value is determined based on the following conditions:
When the lower limit S1 is greater than the input value S3, the input value S3 minus the lower limit value S1 is
stored in D as the output value.
When the upper limit S2 is less than the input value S3, the input value S3 minus the upper limit value S2 is
stored in D as the output value.
When Lower limit S1 Input value S3 Upper limit S2, zero is stored in D as the output value.
Output value D

Lower limit of
deadband S1
0
Input value S3

Upper limit of deadband S2

In this range, zero is output.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is overflowed or
underflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when the input value is recognized as “0.

3 − 662

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F288 (DBAND) 32-bit data deadband control


P288 (PDBAND)
Outline This instruction carries out dead-band control for 32-bit data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P288
(PDBAND)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F288 (DBAND)
R0 DT 10
10 F288 DBAND, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 The area where the lower limit is stored or the lower limit data. (2 words)
S2 The area where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data. (2 words)
S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data. (2 words)
D The area where the output value is stored. (2 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
When “DT10 and DT11” is “K−10000”and “DT20 and DT21” is “K10000”.
Value of DT30 and DT31 Value of DT40 and DT41
K−30000 → K−20000
K−20000 → K−10000
K−10000 to K10000 → K0
K20000 → K10000
K30000 → K20000

3 − 663

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The output value (double word data) stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not
the input value (double word data) specified by S3 falls within the dead-band bounded by the upper and lower
limits set in S1 and S2.
The output value is determined based on the following conditions:
When the lower limit S1+1 and S1 are greater than the input value S3+1 and S3, the input value S3+1 and S3
minus the lower limit value S1+1 and S1 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the upper limit S2+1 and S2 are less than the input value S3+1 and S3, the input value S3+1 and S3
minus the upper limit value S2+1 and S2 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When Lower limit S1+1 and S1 Input value S3+1 and S3 Upper limit S2+1 and S2, zero is stored in D+1
and D as the output value.
Output value D+1 and D

Lower limit of deadband


S1+1 and S1
0
Input value S3+1 and S3

Upper limit of deadband S2+1 and S2

In this range, zero is output.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is overflowed or
underflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when the input value is recognized as “0.”

3 − 664

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F289 (ZONE) 16-bit data zone control


P289 (PZONE)
Outline This instruction carries out zone control for 16-bit data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level instruction “P289
(PZONE)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

10 ST R 0
Trigger
11 F289 (ZONE)
R0 DT 10

10 F289 ZONE, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20


DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 Area where negative bias value is stored or negative bias value data
S2 Area where positive bias value is stored or positive bias value data
S3 Area where input value is stored or input value data
D Area where output value is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
When the DT10 is “K−100” and DT20 is “K100”.
Value of DT30 Value of DT40
K−300 → K−400
K−200 → K−300
K−100 → K−200
K0 → K0
K100 → K200
K200 → K300
K300 → K400

3 − 665

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The bias value specified by S1 or S2 is added to the input value (word data) specified by S3, and the output
value is stored in the area specified by D.
The output value is determined by the following conditions:
When the input value S3 is less than zero, the input value S3 plus the negative bias value S1 is stored in D as
the output value.
When the input value S3 equals zero, zero is stored in D as the output value.
When the input value S3 is greater than zero, the input value S3 plus the positive bias value S2 is stored in D
as the output value.

Output value D

Positive bias value S2

0 Input value S3

Negative bias value S1

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is overflowed or
underflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the input value S3 is recognized as “0”.

3 − 666

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F290 (DZONE) 32-bit data zone control


P290 (PDZONE)
Outline This instruction carries out zone control for 32-bit data. (double words)
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X, the P type high−level Instruction “P290
(PDZONE)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F290 (DZONE)
R0 DT 10
10 F290 DZONE, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 Area where negative bias value is stored or negative bias value data (double
words)
S2 Area where positive bias value is stored or positive bias value data (double
words)
S3 Area where input value is stored or input value data (double words)
D Area (double words) where output value is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
When the “DT10 and DT11” is “K−10000” and the “DT20 and DT21” is “K10000”.
Value of DT30 and DT31 Value of DT40 and DT41
K−30000 → K−40000
K−20000 → K−30000
K−10000 → K−20000
K0 → K0
K10000 → K20000
K20000 → K30000
K30000 → K40000

3 − 667

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The bias value specified by S1 or S2 is added to the input value (double word data) specified by S3, and the
output value is stored in the area specified by D.
The output value is determined by the following conditions:
When the input value S3+1 and S3 are less than zero, the input value S3+1 and S3 plus the negative bias
value S1+1 and S1 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the input value S3+1 and S3 equals zero, zero is stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the input value S3+1 and S3 is greater than zero, the input value S3+1 and S3 plus the positive bias
value S2+1 and S2 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.

Output value D+1 and D

Positive bias value


S2+1 and S2

0 Input value S3+1 and S3


Negative bias value S1+1 and S1

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the calculated result is overflowed or
underflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the input value S3 is recognized as “0”.

3 − 668

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F300 (BSIN) BCD type Sine operation


P300 (PBSIN)
Outline Triangle functions, calculates trigonometric functions and the sine
[SIN( )] of BCD code angular data, and stores it as BCD.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F300 (BSIN)
R0
DT 10
10 F300 BSIN, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D

S Area where angle data is stored or angle data


D Starting 16-bit area where calculated result is stored (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
Calculates the SIN ( ) of the angle 45 degrees.
DT10: H45

DT20: H0
DT21: H0
DT22: H7071

Calculates the SIN ( ) of the angle 270 degrees.


DT10: H270

DT20: H1
DT21: H1
DT22: H0

3 − 669

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The SIN([S]) of an angle data (units are degrees) specified by S is calculated and the result stored in the
3-word area beginning at D.
SIN[S] → [D] [D+1]. [D+2]
D: Sign
D+1: Integer value
D+2: Decimal

Select a BCD value for S within the range 0° to 360° in units of 1 degree. Be sure to specify the value using
BCD H data.
The sign stored in D is 0 when the result of processing is positive, and 1 when the result is negative.
The result of processing stored in D+1 and D+2 is a BCD value within the range −1.0000 to 1.0000.
The decimal stored in D+2 is rounded off to four digits.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data specified in S is not BCD value.
− If data specified in S is not within 0° to 360°.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 670

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F301 (BCOS) BCD type Cosine operation


P301(PBCOS)
Outline Triangle functions, calculates trigonometric functions and the cosine
[COS ( )] of BCD code angular data, and stores it as BCD.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F301 (BCOS)
R0
DT 10
10 F301 BCOS, DT10, DT20
DT 20
S D
S Area where angle data is stored or angle data
D Starting 16-bit area where calculated result is stored (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
Calculates the COS ( ) of the angle 30 degrees.
DT10: H30

DT20: H0
DT21: H0
DT22: H8660

Calculates the COS ( ) of the angle 135 degrees.


DT10: H135

DT20: H1
DT21: H1
DT22: H7071

3 − 671

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The COS([S]) of an angle data (units are degrees) specified by S is calculated and the result stored in the
3-word area beginning at D.
COS[S] → [D] [D+1]. [D+2]
D: Sign
D+1: Integer value
D+2: Decimal

Select a BCD value for S within the range 0° to 360° in units of 1 degree. Be sure to specify the value using
BCD H data.
The sign stored in D is 0 when the result of processing is positive, and 1 when the result is negative.
The result of processing stored in D+1 and D+2 is a BCD value within the range −1.0000 to 1.0000.
The decimal stored in D+2 is rounded off to four digits.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data specified in S is not BCD value.
− If data specified in S is not within 0° to 360°.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 672

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F302 (BTAN) BCD type Tangent operation


P302 (PBTAN)
Outline Triangle functions, calculates trigonometric functions and the tangent
[TAN ( )] of BCD code angular data, and stores it as BCD.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F302 (BTAN)
R0
DT 10
10 F302 BTAN, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Area where angle data is stored or angle data
D Starting 16-bit area where calculated result is stored (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
Calculates the TAN ( ) of the angle 60 degrees.
DT10: H60

DT20: H0
DT21: H1
DT22: H7321

Calculates the TAN ( ) of the angle 135 degrees.


DT10: H135

DT20: H1
DT21: H1
DT22: H0

3 − 673

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The TAN([S]) of an angle data (units are degrees) specified by S is calculated and the result stored in the
3-word area beginning at D.
TAN[S] → [D] [D+1]. [D+2]
D: Sign
D+1: Integer value
D+2: Decimal

Select a BCD value for S within the range 0° to 360° in units of 1 degree. Be sure to specify the value using
BCD H data.
The sign stored in D is 0 when the result of processing is positive, and 1 when the result is negative.
The result of processing stored in D+1 and D+2 is a BCD value within the range −57.2900 to 57.2900.
The decimal stored in D+2 is rounded off to four digits.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data specified in S is not BCD value.
− If data specified in S is not within 0° to 360°.
− If data specified in S is 90° to 270°.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 674

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F303 (BASIN) BCD type Arcsine operation


P303 (PBASIN)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates arcsine [SIN−1 ( )].
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F303 (BASIN)
R0
DT 20
10 F303 BASIN, DT20, DT10
DT 10

S D
S Starting 16-bit area where angle data is stored or angle data (3 words)
D Area where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
Calculates the arc SIN of the value 0.7071.
DT20: H0
DT21: H0
DT22: H7071

DT10: H45

Calculates the arc SIN of the value −0.5.


DT20: H1
DT21: H0
DT22: H5000

DT10: H330

3 − 675

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
SIN−1 (the arcsine) of the value specified in S, S+1, and S+2 is calculated, and the result (an angle) is stored
in D.
SIN−1 ([S] [S+1]. [S+2]) → [D]
S: Sign
S+1: Integer value
S+2: Decimal

Set 0 for the sign in S when the data to be processed is positive, and set 1 for the sign when the data is
negative.
Set the integer and decimal parts of the data each within a range of 0 to 1.0000 in S+1 and S+2.
The result of the calculation will be stored in D as a BCD value within the range 0° to 90° or 270° to 360° (in
degrees).

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data specified in S+2, S+1 and S are not BCD value.
− If data specified in S+2, S+1 and S are not within −1.0000 to 1.0000.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 676

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F304 (BACOS) BCD type Arccosine operation


P304 (PBACOS)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates arccosine [COS−1 ( )].
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F304 (BACOS)
R0
DT 20
10 F304 BACOS, DT20, DT10
DT 10

S D

S Starting 16-bit area where angle data is stored or angle data (3 words)
D Area where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
Calculates the arc COS of the value 0.8660.
DT20: H0
DT21: H0
DT22: H8660

DT10: H30

Calculates the arc COS of the value −0.5.


DT20: H1
DT21: H0
DT22: H5000

DT10: H120

3 − 677

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
COS−1 (the arccosine) of the value specified in S, S+1, and S+2 is calculated, and the result (an angle) is
stored in D.
COS−1 ([S][S+1]. [S+2]) → [D]
S: Sign
S+1: Integer value
S+2: Decimal

Set 0 for the sign in S when the data to be processed is positive, and set 1 for the sign when the data is
negative.
Set the integer and decimal parts of the data each within a range of 0 to 1.0000 in S+1 and S+2.
The result of the calculation will be stored in D as a BCD value within the range 0° to 180° (in degrees).

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data specified in S+2, S+1 and S are not BCD value.
− If data specified in S+2, S+1 and S are not within −1.0000 to 1.0000.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 678

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F305 (BATAN) BCD type Arctangent operation


P305 (PBATAN)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates arctangent [TAN−1 ( )].
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F305 (BATAN)
R0
DT 20
10 F305 BATAN, DT20, DT10
DT 10

S D
S Starting 16-bit area where angle data is stored or angle data (3 words)
D Area where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
Calculates the arc TAN of the value 1.7321.
DT20: H0
DT21: H0
DT22: H7321

DT10: H60

Calculates the arc TAN of the value −1.


DT20: H1
DT21: H1
DT22: H0

DT10: H315

3 − 679

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
TAN−1 (the arctangent) of the value specified in S, S+1, and S+2 is calculated, and the result (an angle) is
stored in D.
TAN−1 ([S][S+1]. [S+2]) → [D]
S: Sign
S+1: Integer value
S+2: Decimal

Set 0 for the sign in S when the data to be processed is positive, and set 1 for the sign when the data is
negative.
Set the integer and decimal parts of the data each within a range of 0 to 9999.9999 in S+1 and S+2.
The result of the calculation will be stored in D as a BCD value within the range 0° to 90° or 270° to 360° (in
degrees).

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data specified in S+2, S+1 and S are not BCD value.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 680

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F309 (FMV) Floating point data move


P309 (PFMV)
Outline Copies floating point data (32 bits) to the specified 32-bit area.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P309 (PFMV)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F309 (FMV)
R0
f 1.234
10 F309 FMV, f 1.234, DT10
DT 10

S D

S Floating point data (32 bits) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area for 32-bit area (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
The floating point data “f 1.234” are copied to data registers DT11 and DT10 when trigger R0 turns on.
DT10:
(f1.234)
DT11:

3 − 681

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The floating point data (32 bits) specified by S is copied to the 32-bit area specified by D when the trigger turns
on.
Floating point data

Real number data 15 0


DT: Lower word
D+1: Higher word

Range of real number data which can be set are as follows:


Positive: f0.0000001 to f9999999
Negative: f−9999999 to f−0.000001

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F309 (FMV) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.

3 − 682

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F310 (F+) Floating point data addition


P310 (PF+)
Outline Adds two real number data items and stores the result in the specified
area.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P310 (PF+)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F310 (F+)
R0
DT 10
10 F310 F+, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D

S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for augend)
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for addend)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for result)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The real number data (2 words) specified by S1 and S2 are added together when the trigger turns on. The
added result is stored in D+1 and D.
[S1+1, S1] + [S2+1, S2] → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S1] and[S2], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F310 F+, % DT 0, % DT 2, DT 4

3 − 683

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F310 F+, DT 0, DT 2, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S1 and S2, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Program example
The “f4.554” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F310 F+, f1.414, f3.14, DT30

The “f135.795” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F309 FMV, f12.345 DT10
F309 FMV, f12.345, DT20
F310 F+, DT10, DT20, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F310 (F+) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1 and S1” and “S2+1
and S2.”
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 684

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F311 (F−) Floating point data subtraction


P311 (PF−)
Outline Subtracts real nuumber data from the minuend and stores the result in
the specified area.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P311 (PF−)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F311 (F−)
R0
DT 10
10 F311 F−, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D
S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for minuend)
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for subtrahend)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for result)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
Subtracts the real number data (2 words) specified by S2 from the real number data (32-bit) specified by S1
when the trigger turns on. The subtracted result is stored in D+1 and D.
[S1+1, S1] − [S2+1, S2] → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S1] and [S2], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F311 F−, % DT 0, % DT 2, DT 4

3 − 685

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F311 F−, DT 0, DT 2, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S1 and S2, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Program example
The “f0.445” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F311 F−, f1, f0.555, DT30

The “f100.15” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F309 FMV, f100.1, DT10
F309 FMV, f0.05, DT20
F311 F−, DT10, DT20, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F311 (F–) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1 and S1” and “S2+1
and S2.”
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 686

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F312 (F*) Floating point data multiplication


P312 (PF*)
Outline Multiplies two real number data items and stores the result in the
specified 32-bit area.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instructions
are not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F312 (F*)
R0
DT 10
10 F312 F*, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D
S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for
multiplicand)
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for multiplier)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for result)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
Multiplies the real number data (2 words) specified by S1 and the one specified by S2 when the trigger turns
on.
The multiplied result is stored in D+1 and D (32-bit area).
[S1+1, S1] × [S2+1, S2] → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S1] and [S2], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F312 F*, % DT 0, % DT 2, DT 4

3 − 687

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F312 F*, DT 0, DT 2, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S1 and S2, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Program example
The “f123.4000” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F312 F*, f1.234, f100, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP, this instruction F312 (F*) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1 and S1” and “S2+1
and S2.”
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 688

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F313 (F%) Floating point data division


P313 (PF%)
Outline Divides real number data by the divisor and stores the divided result in
the specified 32-bit area.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P313 (PF%)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F313 (F%)
R0
DT 10
10 F313 F%, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D
S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for dividend)
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for divisor)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for result)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The real number data (2 words) specified by S1 is divided by the real number data (2 words) specified by S2
when the trigger turns on. The result is stored in D+1 and D.
[S1+1, S1] ÷ [S2+1, S2] → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S1] and [S2], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F313 F%, % DT 0, % DT 2, DT4

3 − 689

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F313 F%, DT 0, DT 2, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S1 and S2, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Program example
The “f5.432100” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F312 F%, f54.321, f10, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP, this instruction F313 (F%) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1 and S1” and “S2+1
and S2.”
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
− The real number data (floating point data) for the divisor specified by S2 is
“0.0”.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 690

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F314 (SIN) Floating point data Sine operation


P314 (PSIN)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates sine [SIN ( )].
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P314 (PSIN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F314 (SIN)
R0
F314 SIN, DT10, DT20 DT 10
10
DT 20
S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The SIN([S+1 and S]) of an angle data (units are radians) specified by S+1 and S is calculated and the result
stored in D+1 and D.
SIN ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F314 SIN, % DT 0, DT 4

3 − 691

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F314 SIN, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

Program example
The “f0.4999999” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
Radians of 30 deg.
R0
F314 SIN, f0.5235987, DT20

Precautions during programming


The accuracy of the calculation decreases as the absolute value of the angle data specified in S+1 and S
increases. We recommend that angle data be set within the following range:
−2π (radians) [S+1, S] 2π (radians)
For FP0, this instruction F314 (SIN) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
− Absolute value of S+1 and S is 52707176 or greater.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 692

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F315 (COS) Floating point data Cosine operation


P315 (PCOS)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates cosine [COS ( )].
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P315 (PCOS)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F315 (COS)
R0
DT 10
10 F315 COS, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The COS ([S+1 and S]) of an angle data (units are radians) specified by S+1 and S is calculated and the result
stored in D+1 and D.
COS ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F315 COS, % DT 0, DT 4

3 − 693

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F315 COS, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

Program example
The “f0.7071068” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
Radians of 45 °
R0
F315 COS, f0.7853981, DT20

Precautions during programming


The accuracy of the calculation decreases as the absolute value of the angle data specified in S and S+1
increases. We recommend that angle data be set within the following range:
−2π (radians) [S+1, S] 2π (radians)
For FP0, this instruction F315 (COS) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
− Absolute value of S+1 and S is 52707176 or greater.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 694

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F316 (TAN) Floating point data Tangent operation


P316 (PTAN)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates tangent [TAN ( )].
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P316 (PTAN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F316 (TAN)
R0
DT 10
10 F316 TAN, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The TAN([S+1 and S]) of an angle data (units are radians) specified by S+1 and S is calculated and the result
stored in D+1 and D.
TAN ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F316 TAN, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F316 TAN, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 695

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f1.732048” is stored to DT20 and DT22 when the R0 turns on.
Radians of 60 °
R0
F316 TAN, f1.047197, DT20

Precautions during programming


The accuracy of the calculation decreases as the absolute value of the angle data specified in S+1 and S
increases. We recommend that angle data be set within the following range:
−2π (radians) [S+1, S] 2π (radians)
For FP0, this instruction F316 (TAN) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
− Absolute value of S+1 and S is 52707176 or greater.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”

3 − 696

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F317 (ASIN) Floating point data Arcsine operation


P317 (PASIN)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates arcsine [SIN−1 ( )].
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P317 (PASIN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F317 (ASIN)
R0
DT 10
10 F317 ASIN, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
SIN of the value specified in S+1 and S is calculated, and the result [an angle (radians)] is stored in D+1 and
D.
SIN−1 ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F317 ASIN, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F317 ASIN, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 697

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f0.5235986 (radians of 30 degrees)” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F317 ASIN, f0.4999999, DT20

Precautions during programming


D+1 and D is stored within the following range: −π/2 (radians) [D+1, D] π/2 (radians)
For FP0, this instruction F317 (ASIN) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− S+1 and S is not within the range −1.0 [S+1, S] 1.0
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 698

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F318 (ACOS) Floating point data Arccosine operation


P318 (PACOS)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates arccosine [COS−1 ( )].
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P318 (PACOS)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F318 (ACOS)
R0
DT 10
10 F318 ACOS, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
COS of the value specified in S+1 and S is calculated, and the result [an angle data (units and radians)] is
stored in D+1 and D.
COS−1 ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F318 ACOS, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F318 ACOS, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 699

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f0.7853980 (radians of 45 degrees)” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F318 ACOS, f0.7071069, DT20

Precautions during programming


D+1 and D is stored within the following range: 0.0 (radians) [D+1, D] π (radians)
For FP0, this instruction F318 (ACOS) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− S+1 and S is not within the range −1.0 [S+1, S] 1.0
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 700

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F319 (ATAN) Floating point data Arctangent operation


P319 (PATAN)
Outline Triangle functions, This instruction calculates arctangent [TAN−1 ( )].
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P319 (PATAN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F319 (ATAN)
R0
F319 ATAN, DT10, DT20 DT 10
10
DT 20
S D

S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
TAN−1 (the arctangent) of the value specified in S+1 and S is calculated, and the result [an angle data (units
and radians)] is stored in D+1 and D.
TAN−1 ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F319 ATAN, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F319 ATAN, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 701

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f1.047197 (radians of 60 degres)” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F319 ATAN, f1.73205, DT20

Precautions during programming


D+1 and D is stored within the following range: − π/2 (radians) < [D+1, D] < π/2 (radians)
For FP0, this instruction F319 (ATAN) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 702

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F320 (LN) Floating point data natural logarithm


P320 (PLN)
Outline This instruction calculates a natural logarithm LN( ).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P320 (PLN)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F320 (LN)
R0
DT 10
10 F320 LN, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The natural logarithm LN(S+1 and S) is calculated of the data specified in S+1 and S, and the result is stored
in D+1 and D.
LN ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F320 LN, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F320 LN, DT 0, % DT 4

3 − 703

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f1.6094379” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F320 LN, K 5, DT20

The “f−0.3160815” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F320 LN, f0.729, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F320 (LN) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The S+1 and S is not greater than zero.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 704

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F321 (EXP) Floating point data exponent


P321 (PEXP)
Outline This instruction calculates the exponent of a floating point real number
EXP( ).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P321 (PEXP)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F321 (EXP)
R0
DT 10
10 F321 EXP, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The exponent EXP(S+1 and S) is calculated from the real number data specified in S+1 and S, and the result
is stored in D+1 and D.
EXP ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
The calculation is performed with the exponent base (e) equal to 2.718282.
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F321 EXP, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F321 EXP, DT 0, % DT 4

3 − 705

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f7.389056” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F321 EXP, K 2, DT20

The “f221.406402” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F321 EXP, f5.4, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F321 (EXP) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 706

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F322 (LOG) Floating point data logarithm


P322 (PLOG)
Outline This instruction calculates the logarithm of a floating point real number
LOG( ).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P322 (PLOG)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F322 (LOG)
R0
DT 10
10 F322 LOG, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Angle data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where angle data is
stored
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where calculated result is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The logarithm LOG(S+1 and S) is calculated of the data specified in S+1 and S, and the result is stored in D+1
and D.
LOG ([S+1, S]) → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F322 LOG, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F322 LOG, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 707

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f1.30103” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F322 LOG, K20, DT20

The “f0.0108932” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F322 LOG, f1.0254, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F322 (LOG) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The S+1 and S is not greater than zero.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 708

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F323 (PWR) Floating point data power


P323 (PPWR)
Outline This instruction raises a floating point real number to the specified
power.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P323 (PPWR)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F323 (PWR)
R0
DT 10
10 F323 PWR, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D
S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for
multiplicand)
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for multiplier)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (for result)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The real number data specified by S1+1 and S1 is raised to the power specified by the real number data of
S2+1 and S2, and the result is stored in D+1 and D.
[S1+1, S] ^ [S2+1, S2] → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S1] and [S2], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F323 PWR, % DT 0, % DT 2, DT 4

3 − 709

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F323 PWR, DT 0, DT 2, % DT4

When the constant K is specified in S1 and S2, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Program example
The “f625.0” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F323 PWR, K 5, K 4, DT20

The “f30.51758” is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F323 PWR, f3.125, K 3, DT30

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F323 (PWR) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1 and S1” and “S2+1
and S2.”
− The power of negative number data is not an integer
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 710

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F324 (FSQR) Floating point data square root


P324 (PFSQR)
Outline Takes the square root of the specified real number data and stores result
in the specified area.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P324 (PFSQR)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F324 (FSQR)
R0
DT 10
10 F324 FSQR, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit area for storing data
to be calculated
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit area for storing the calculated result

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The square root of real number data specified by S is calculated and stored in the 32-bit area specified by D.
√[S1+1, S] → [D+1, D]
Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F324 FSQR, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F324 FSQR, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 711

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f1.41421” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F324 FSQR, K 2, DT20

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F324 (FSQR) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The S+1 and S is not greater than zero.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 712

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F325 (FLT) 16-bit integer data → Floating point real number data
P325 (PFLT)
Outline Converts 16-bit integer data to floating point real number data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P325 (PFLT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F325 (FLT)
R0
DT 10
10 F325 FLT, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S 16-bit integer data or 16-bit area for storing integer data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of floating point real number data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
Converts the 16-bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data when the trigger turns on.
The converted data is stored in D.

Signed 16-bit 15 0
integer data S:

15 0
Floating point
real number data D: Lower word

D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F325 (FLT) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

3 − 713

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・=lag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 714

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F326 (DFLT) 32-bit integer data → Floating point real number data
P326 (PDFLT)
Outline Converts 32-bit integer data to floating point real number data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P326 (PDFLT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F326 (DFLT)
R0
DT 10
10 F326 DFLT, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S 32-bit integer data or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area for 32-bit data floating point real number (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Description
Converts the 32-bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data when the trigger turns on. The
converted data is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
32-bit integer S: Lower word
data with sign S+1: Higher word

15 0
Floating point D: Lower word
real number
D+1: Higher word
data

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F326 (DFLT) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

3 − 715

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.
・Carry flag (R9009): There are too many significant digits in mantissa of converted real number
data.

3 − 716

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F327 (INT) Floating point real number data → 16-bit integer data
(largest integer not exceeding the floating point real
P327 (PINT) number data)

Outline Converts real number data to 16-bit integer data (the largest integer not
exceeding the floating point real number data).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P327 (PINT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F327 (INT)
R0
DT 10
10 F327 INT, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D

S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D 16-bit area for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “1.234” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f1.234)
DT11:

DT20: (K1)

When the real number data “−1.234” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−1.234)
DT11:

DT20: (K−2)

3 − 717

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Converts real number data range: (+32767.99 to −32767.99) specified by S to signed 16-bit integer data (the
largest integer not exceeding the floating point data) when the trigger turns on. The converted data is stored
in D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Signed 16-bit
D:
integer data

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F327 (INT) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The converted data exceeds the range of 16-bit integer data.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 718

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F328 (DINT) Floating point real number data → 32-bit integer data
(largest integer not exceeding the floating point real
P328 (PDINT) number data)

Outline Converts real number data to 32-bit integer data (the largest integer not
exceeding the floating point real number data).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P328 (PDINT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F328 (DINT)
R0
DT 10
10 F328 DINT, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “12345.67” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f12345.67)
DT11:

DT20:
(K12345)
DT21:

When the real number data “−12345.67” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−12345.67)
DT11:

DT20:
(K−12346)
DT21:

3 − 719

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Converts real number data (range: +2147483000 to −2147483000) specified by S+1 and S to signed 32-bit
integer data (the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data) when the trigger turns on. The
converted data is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Signed 32-bit Lower word
D:
integer data
D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F328 (DINT) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The converted data exceeds the range of 32-bit integer data.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 720

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F329 (FIX) Floating point real number data → 16-bit integer data
(rounding the first decimal point down to integer)
P329 (PFIX)
Outline Converts real number data to 16-bit integer data (rounding the first
decimal point down to integer).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P329 (PFIX)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F329 (FIX)
R0
DT 10
10 F329 FIX, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “1.234567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f1.234567)
DT11:

DT20: (K1)

When the real number data “−1.234567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−1.234567)
DT11:

DT20: (K−1)

3 − 721

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Converts real number data (range: 32767.99 to −32768.99) specified by S to signed 16-bit integer data
(rounding the first decimal point down to integer) when the trigger turns on. The converted data is stored in D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Signed 16-bit
integer data D:

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F329 (FIX) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The converted data exceeds the range of 16-bit integer data.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 722

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F330 (DFIX) Floating point real number data → 32-bit integer data
(rounding the first decimal point down to integer)
P330 (PDFIX)
Outline Converts real number data to 32-bit integer data (rounding the first
decimal point down to integer).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P330 (PDFIX)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F330 (DFIX)
R0 DT 10
10 F330 DFIX, DT10, DT20 DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “123456.7” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f123456.7)
DT11:

DT20:
(K123456)
DT21:

When the real number data “−123456.7” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−123456.7)
DT11:

DT20:
(K−123456)
DT21:

3 − 723

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Converts real number data (range: −2,147,483,000 to 2,147,483,000) specified by S+1 and S to signed
32-bit integer data (rounding the first decimal point down to integer) when the trigger turns on. The converted
data is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Signed 32-bit Lower word
D:
integer data
D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F330 (DFIX) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The converted data exceeds the range of 32-bit integer data.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 724

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F331 (ROFF) Floating point real number data → 16-bit integer data
(rounding the first decimal point off to integer)
P331 (PROFF)
Outline Converts real number data to 16-bit integer data (rounding the first
decimal point off to integer).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P331 (PROFF)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F331 (ROFF)
R0 DT 10
10 F331 ROFF, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D 16-bit area for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f1234.567)
DT11:

DT20: (K1235)

When the real number data “−1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−1234.567)
DT11:

DT20: (K−1235)

3 − 725

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Converts real number data (range: +32767.49 to −32768.49) specified by S to signed 16-bit integer data
(rounding the first decimal point off to integer) when the trigger turns on. The converted data is stored in D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Signed 16-bit
integer data D:

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F331 (ROFF) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The converted data exceeds the range of 16-bit integer data.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 726

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F332 (DROFF) Floating point real number data → 32-bit integer data
(rounding the first decimal point off to integer)
P332 (PDROFF)
Outline Converts real number data to 32-bit integer data (rounding the first
decimal point off to integer).
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P332 (PDROFF)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F332 (DROFF)
R0 DT 10
10 F332 DROFF, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “45678.51” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f45678.51)
DT11:

DT20:
(K45679)
DT21:

When the real number data “−45678.51” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−45678.51)
DT11:

DT20:
(K−45679)
DT21:

3 − 727

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Converts real number data (range: −2,147,483,000 to 2,147,483,000) specified by S+1 and S to signed
32-bit integer data (rounding the first decimal point off to integer) when the trigger turns on. The converted
data is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Signed 32-bit Lower word
D:
integer data
D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F332 (DROFF) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− The converted data exceeds the range of 32-bit integer data.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on for an instant when the converted data is recognized as “0”.

3 − 728

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F333 (FINT) Floating point real number data rounding the first
decimal point down
P333 (PFINT)
Outline This instruction rounds down the decimal part of real number data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P333 (PFINT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F333 (FINT)
R0 DT 10
10 F333 FINT, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f1234.567)
DT11:

DT20:
(f1234.000)
DT21:

When the real number data “−1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−1234.567)
DT11:

DT20:
(f−1235.000)
DT21:

3 − 729

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The decimal part of the real number data specified in S+1 and S is rounded down, and the result is stored in
D+1 and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Real number Lower word
D:
data
D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F333 (FINT) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 730

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F334 (FRINT) Floating point real number data rounding the first
P334 (PFRINT) decimal point off

Outline This instruction rounds off the decimal part of real number data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P334 (PFRINT)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F334 (FRINT)
R0 DT 10
10 F334 FRINT, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A* N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f1234.567)
DT11:

DT20:
(f1235.000)
DT21:

When the real number data “−1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−1234.567)
DT11:

DT20:
(f−1235.000)
DT21:

3 − 731

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The decimal part of the real number data stored in S+1 and S is rounded off, and the result is stored in D+1
and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Real number Lower word
D:
data
D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F334 (FRINT) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 732

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F335 (F+/−) Floating point real number data sign changes


(negative/positive conversion)
P335 (PF+/−)
Outline This instruction changes the sign of real number data.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P335 (PF+/−)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F335 (F+/−)
R0 DT 10
10 F335 F+/−, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “−60000.00” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−60000.00)
DT11:

DT20:
(f60000.00)
DT21:

When the real number data “−30000.00” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−30000.00)
DT11:

DT20:
(f30000.00)
DT21:

3 − 733

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The real number data stored in S+1 and S is changed sign bit, and the result is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Real number Lower word
D:
data
D+1: Higher word

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F335 (F+/−) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 734

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F336 (FABS) Floating point real number data absolute


P336 (PFABS)

Outline Takes absolute value of real number data.


For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P336 (PFABS)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F336 (FABS)
R0 DT 10
10 F336 FABS, DT10, DT20 DT 20

S D
S Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data (source)
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data (destination)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Explanation of example
When the real number data “1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f1234.567)
DT11:

DT20:
(f1234.567)
DT21:

When the real number data “−1234.567” is in DT10 and DT11, as shown below.
DT10:
(f−1234.567)
DT11:

DT20:
(f1234.567)
DT21:

3 − 735

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by S when the trigger turns on. The result (absolute
value) is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Real number
data S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Real number Lower word
D:
data
D+1: Higher word

Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
When the constant K is specified in [S], the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F336 (FABS) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 736

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F337 (RAD) Floating point real number data conversion of angle


units (Degrees → Radians)
P337 (PRAD)
Outline This instruction converts the units of an angle from degrees to radians.
For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P337 (PRAD)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F337 (RAD)
R0 DT 10
10 F337 RAD, DT10, DT20 DT 20

S D
S Angle data (degrees) (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The data in degrees of an angle specified in S+1 and S is converted to radians (real number data) and the
result is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Angle data (degrees)
(Real number data) S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Angle data (radians) Lower word
D:
(Real number data)
D+1: Higher word

Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.

3 − 737

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
The “f0.7853981” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F337 RAD, f45, DT20

Precaution during programming


For FP0, this instruction F337 (RAD) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 738

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F338 (DEG) Floating point real number data conversion of angle


P338 (PDEG) units (Radians → Degrees)

Outline Converts the units of an angle from radians to degrees.


For the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0/FP−e, the P type high−level instruction
“P338 (PDEG)” is not available.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F338 (DEG)
R0 DT 10
10 F338 DEG, DT10, DT20 DT 20

S D
S Angle data (radians) (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data
D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for storing converted data

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The angle data in radians (real number data) specified in S+1 and S is converted to angle data in degrees and
the result is stored in D+1 and D.
15 0
Angle data (radians)
(Real number data) S: Lower word

S+1: Higher word

15 0
Angle data (degrees) Lower word
D:
(Real number data)
D+1: Higher word

3 − 739

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [S], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers before
operations continue.
R0
F338 DEG, % DT 0, DT 4

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F338 DEG, DT 0, % DT 4

When the constant K is specified in S, the operations are the same as when a integer device is specified.
Program example
The “f30.00000” is stored to DT20 and DT21 when the R0 turns on.
R0
F338 DEG, f0.5235987, DT20

Precautions during programming


When the constant or integer device is specified in S, the integer device cannot be set in D.
For FP0, this instruction F338 (DEG) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in S+1 and S.
− If result of processing is outside integer range when integer device specified
in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of processing is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 740

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F345 (FCMP) Floating point real number data comparison


P345 (PFCMP)
Outline Compares one real number data (floating point data) item with another.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F345 (FCMP)
R0 DT 10
10 F345 FCMP, DT10, DT20 DT 20

S1 S2
S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data to be compared
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data to be compared

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
A: Available

* Index modification of a real number is not possible.


Description
Compares the real number data (floating point data) specified by S1 with that specified by S2 when the trigger
turns on. The comparison result is stored in special internal relays R9009, and R900A to R900C.
The following table lists the states of the carry flag (R9009), > flag (R900A), = flag (R900B), and < flag
(R900C), depending on the relative sizes of (S1+1, S1) and (S2+1, S2).

Flag
Comparison between
(S1+1, S1) and (S2+1, S2) R900A R900B R900C R9009
(> flag) (= flag) (< flag) (carry flag)
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) off off on
(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) off on off off
(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) on off off
“ ”: turns on or off according to the conditions

Specifying the integer device with [S1] and [S2], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.

When the constant K is specified in S1 and S2, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

3 − 741

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data are specified in (S1+1, S1) and (S2+1,
S2).

3 − 742

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F346 (FWIN) Floating point real number data band comparison


P346 (PFWIN)
Outline Compares one real number data item with the data band specified by
two other real number data items.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F346 (FWIN)
R0
DT 10
10 F346 FWIN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20

S1 S2 S3 DT 30

S1 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data to be compared
S2 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for lower limit
S3 Real number data (2 words) or lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for upper limit

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
A: Available

* Index modification of a real number is not possible.


Description
Compares the floating point real number data specified by S1 with the data band specified by S2 and S3,
when the trigger turns on. This instruction checks whether S1 is in the data band between S2 (lower limit) and
S3 (upper limit), larger than S3, or smaller than S2. The comparison result is stored in special internal relays
R900A, R900B, and R900C.
The following table lists the states of the carry flag (R9009), > flag (R900A), = flag (R900B), and < flag
(R900C).
Flag
Comparison between
(S1+1, S1), (S2+1, S2) R9009
R900A R900B R900C (Carry
and (S3+1, S3) (> flag) (= flag) (< flag) flag)
(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) off off on X
(S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3) and
(S2+1, S2) (S1+1, S1)
off on off X

(S3+1, S3) < (S1+1, S1) on off off X


“X”: Not changed

3 − 743

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Specifying the integer device with [S1], [S2] and [S3], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.

When the constant K is specified in S1, S2 and S3, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data are specified in “S1+1, S1”, “S2+1, S2”,
and “S3+1, S3”.
− (S2+1, S2) > (S3+1, S3).
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data are specified in “S1+1, S1”, “S2+1, S2”,
and “S3+1, S3”.
− (S2+1, S2) > (S3+1, S3).

3 − 744

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F347 (FLIMT) Floating point data upper and lower limit control
P347 (PFLIMT)
Outline This instruction carries out upper and lower limit control for real number
data.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F347 (FLIMT)
R0 DT 10
10 F347 FLIMT, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 The area where the lower limit is stored or the lower limit data. (2 words)
S2 The area where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data. (2 words)
S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data. (2 words)
D The area where the output value is stored. (2 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.
Description
The output value (real number data) stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not
the input value (real number data) specified by S3 falls within the range bounded by the upper and lower limits
(real number data) set in S1 and S2.
The output value is determined based on the following conditions:
When the lower limit S1+1 and S1 are greater than the input value S3+1 and S3, the lower limit value S1+1
and S1 stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the upper limit S2+1 and S2 are less than the input value S3+1 and S3, the upper limit value S2+1 and
S2 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.

3 − 745

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

When Lower limit S1+1 and S1 Input value S3+1 and S3 Upper limit S2+1 and S2, the input value S3+1
and S3 stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
Output value D+1 and D

[S2+1, S2]

Lower limit S1+1 and S1


Input value S3+1 and S3
Upper limit S2+1 and S2

[S1+1, S1]

Specifying the integer device with [S1], [S2] and [S3], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.

R0
F347 FLIMT, % DT10, % DT20, DT30, DT40

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.

R0
F347 FLIMT, DT10, DT20, DT30, % DT40

When the constant K is specified in S1, S2 and S3, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in (S1+1 and S1), (S2+1
and S2) and (S3+1 and S3).
− (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2).
− If result of operating is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in D+1 and D.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of operating is within the range of the upper and lower
limits.

3 − 746

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F348 (FBAND) Floating point real number data deadband control


P348 (PFBAND)
Outline This instruction carries out dead-band control for real number data.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F348(FBAND)
R0 DT 10
10 F348 FBAND, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 The area where the lower limit is stored or the lower limit data. (2 words)
S2 The area where the upper limit is stored or the upper limit data. (2 words)
S3 The area where the input value is stored or the input value data. (2 words)
D The area where the output value is stored. (2 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.

3 − 747

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The output value (real number data) stored in the area specified by D is controlled based on whether or not
the input value (real number data) specified by S3 falls within the dead-band bounded by the upper and lower
limits (real number data) set in S1 and S2.
The output value is determined based on the following conditions:
When the lower limit S1+1 and S1 are greater than the input value S3+1 and S3, the input value S3+1 and S3
minus the lower limit value S1+1 and S1 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the upper limit S2+1 and S2 are less than the input value S3+1 and S3, the input value S3+1 and S3
minus the upper limit value S2+1 and S2 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When Lower limit S1+1 and S1 Input value S3+1 and S3 Upper limit S2+1 and S2, 0.0 is stored in D+1
and D as the output value.
Output value D+1 and D

Lower limit of deadband


S1+1 and S1
0
Input value S3+1 and S3

Upper limit of deadband S2+1 and S2

In this range, zero is output.

Specifying the integer device with [S1], [S2] and [S3], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F348 FBAND, % DT10, % DT20, % DT30, DT40

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F348 FBAND, DT10, DT20, DT30, % DT40

When the constant K is specified in S1, S2 and S3, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.
Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1, S1”, “S2+1, S2”
and “S3+1, S3”.
− “S1+1, S1” > “S2+1, S2”.
− If result of operating is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in “D+1, D”.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when result of operating is within the range of the upper and lower
limits.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 748

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F349 (FZONE) Floating point real number data zone control


P349 (PFZONE)
Outline This instruction carries out zone control for real number data.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F349 (FZONE)
R0 DT 10
10 F349 FZONE, DT10, DT20, DT30, DT40 DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 S3 D DT 40

S1 Area where negative bias value is stored or negative bias value data (double
words)
S2 Area where positive bias value is stored or positive bias value data (double
words)
S3 Area where input value is stored or input value data (double words)
D Area (double words) where output value is stored

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A* A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
* Index modification of a real number is not possible.

3 − 749

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Description
The bias value specified by S1 or S2 is added to the input value (real number data) specified by S3, and the
output value is stored in the area specified by D.
The output value is determined by the following conditions:
When the input value S3+1 and S3 are less than 0.0, the input value S3+1 and S3 plus the negative bias value
S1+1 and S1 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the input value S3+1 and S3 are equals 0.0, zero is stored in D+1 and D as the output value.
When the input value S3+1 and S3 are greater than 0.0, the input value S3+1 and S3 plus the positive bias
value S2+1 and S2 are stored in D+1 and D as the output value.

Output value D+1 and D

Positive bias value


S2+1 and S2

0 Input value S3+1 and S3

Negative bias value S1+1 and S1

Specifying the integer device with [S1], [S2] and [S3], the integer data is internally converted to real numbers
before operations continue.
R0
F349 FZONE, % DT10, % DT20, % DT30, DT40

Specifying the integer device with [D], the real numbers are automatically converted into integer data.
R0
F349 FZONE, DT10, DT20, DT30, % DT40

When the constant K is specified in S1, S2 and S3, the operations are the same as when a integer device is
specified.
Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− If data other than real number data is specified in “S1+1, S1”, “S2+1, S2”
and “S3+1, S3.”
− If result of operating is outside integer range when integer device is
specified in “D+1, D”.
・= flag (R900B): Turns on when input value is recognized as “0.”
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when the result is overflowed.

3 − 750

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F350 (FMAX) Maximum value search in floating point real number


P350 (PFMAX) data table
Outline Searches for a maximum value in a table of real number data.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F350 (FMAX)
R0
DT 10
10 F350 FMAX, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D

S1 Starting 16-bit area for storing the real number data


S2 Ending 16-bit area for storing the real number data
D Starting 16-bit area for storing maximum value and relative address (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
This instruction searches for the maximum value in the real number data table between the area selected
with S1 and the area selected with S2, and stores it in the area selected with D+1 and D. The address relative
to S1 is stored in D+2.

Real number data table


S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Maximum value
S1+1: Higher word D+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2: Lower word n


S2+1: Higher word Relative address

3 − 751

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of real number data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.

Real number data table


S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Maximum value
S1+1: Higher word D+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word Relative address

If there are several values which are a maximum value, the relative address of the first value found searching
from S1 is stored in D+2.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
− The real number data is outside possible operating range.

3 − 752

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F351 (FMIN) Minimum value search in floating point real number


data table
P351 (PFMIN)
Outline Searches for a minimum value in a table of real number.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F351 (FMIN)
R0
DT 10
10 F351 FMIN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D
S1 Starting 16-bit area for storing the real number data
S2 Ending 16-bit area for storing the real number data
D Starting 16-bit area for storing minimum value and relative address (3 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
This instruction searches for the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with
S1 and the area selected with S2, and stores it in the area selected with D+1 and D. The address relative to
S1 is stored in D+2.

Real number data table


S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Minimum value
S1+1: Higher word D+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2: Lower word n


S2+1: Higher word Relative address

3 − 753

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of real number data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.

Real number data table


S1: Lower word 0 D: Lower word
Minimum value
S1+1: Higher word D+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1 D+2: Relative address
S1+3:

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word Relative address

If there are several values which are a minimum value, the relative address of the first value found searching
from S1 is stored in D+2.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
− The real number data is outside possible operating range.

3 − 754

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F352 (FMEAN) Total and mean numbers calculation in floating point


real number data table
P352 (PFMEAN)
Outline Calculates the total and mean numbers in the specified real number
data table
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F352 (FMEAN)
R0
DT 10
10 F352 FMEAN, DT10, DT20, DT30
DT 20
DT 30
S1 S2 D
S1 Starting 16-bit area for storing the real number data
S2 Ending 16-bit area for storing the real number data
D Starting 16-bit area for storing total and mean numbers (4 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
The total value and the average value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to the area
selected with S2 are obtained and stored in the area selected with D.
15 0
D Lower word
D+1 Higher word Total
D+2 Lower word
Mean
D+3 Higher word

3 − 755

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of real number data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.
Real number data table
S1: Lower word 0
S1+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1
S1+3:
Specifies areas

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word

Precautions during programming


Even if D+2 overflows the selected area, it will still be stored, and this may corrupt the data in the leading part
of the other area. (An area overflow check is not performed.)
Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
− The real number data is outside possible operating range.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
− The real number data is outside possible operating range.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on for an instant when overflows/underflows while calculating.

3 − 756

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F353 (FSORT) Sort data in real number floating point data table
P353 (PFSORT)
Outline Sorts a string of real number data (in smaller or larger number order).
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F353 (FSORT)
R0
DT 10
10 F353 FSORT, DT10, DT20, K0
DT 20
K 0
S1 S2 S3
S1 Starting 16-bit area of sort data (2 words)
S2 Ending 16-bit area of sort data (2 words)
S3 Constant or area where sort condition is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S1 N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


S2 N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
S3 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
The real number data from the area specified by S1 to the area specified by S2 are sorted in ascending order
(the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first) depending on the condition set with
S3.
If S1 = S2, sorting does not take place.
The sort condition is specified as follows in S3:
− K0: Ascending order
− K1: Descending order
Double sorting is used for the sorting method. Data is sorted from S1 to S2 in order following the sorting
procedure. Note that the number of word comparisons increases in proportion to the square of the number of
words, thus more time will be required for execution when there are a large number of words.

3 − 757

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

If S2 specifies a higher word of real number data, processing will take place over the same area as if the lower
word had been specified.

Real number data table


S1: Lower word 0
S1+1: Higher word
S1+2: 1
S1+3:
Specified areas

S2−1: Lower word n


S2: Higher word

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− S1 > S2.
− The areas of S1 and S2 are different.
− The real number data is outside possible operating range.

3 − 758

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


FP2/FP2SH/FP−X/FPΣ High−level Instructions

F354 (FSCAL) Scaling of real number data Availability


FP2/FP2SH

P354 (PFSCAL) FP−X (V1.13 or more)


FPΣ 32k/FP0R

Outline Scaling(linearization) on a real number data table is performed, and the


output (Y) to an input value (X) is calculated.
With FP2/FP2SH, this function is available from Ver. 1.50 or later.

Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F354 (FSCAL)
R0
DT 0
10 F354 FSCAL, DT0, DT10, DT100
DT 10

S1 S2 D DT 100

S1 Real numerical value or area which shows the input value (X)
S2 Head area of the data table used for scaling
D Area in which the output value (Y) stored

Operands
Timer/ Index
Relay Register Constant Index Integer
Operand Counter register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H H f

S1 A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A A A

S2 A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A

D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A


A: Available
N/A: Not Available

Explanation of example
The output value Y is calcuated for the input value stored in DT0 referring to the data table which starts with
DT10, and the result is stored in DT100.
Description
1) Scaling (linearization) is performed according to the data table of the real number specified by [S2] in the
inputted real numerical value [S1], and an output value is stored in [D].
2) An output value is calculated by searching the linear section of an input value [S1], and computing the
linear interpolation between these two points from the linear table specified by [S2].
When the specified input value is out of the registration range of an linear table, the output value (Y0 or
Yn) over a starting point (x0) or an ending point (xn) is stored, respectively.
[S1] <= x0 −−− [D] = y0
[S1] >= xn −−− [D] = yn

3 − 759

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

3) The linear table [S2] must be having the section of two or more points registered.
Moreover, the linear table must be registered in ascending order, from small to large number of the x
sequences.
2 <= Registration mark (m) <= 99 (m=n+1)
xt−1 < xt (1 <= t <= n)
4) When the distance between two points of a scaling table is very large, an operation error occurs.
for example)
Point1: (x0,y0)=(HFF000000, HFF000000) =(−1.7*1034, −1.7*1034)
Point2: (x1,y1)=(H7F000000, H7F000000) =(+1.7*1034, +1.7*1034)
5) The error of an output result is proportional to the distance between two points of a scaling table.
6) When the integer modifier is specified to be an input value [S1], scaling processing is performed after
changing it into a real numerical value.
7) An output result is changed into an integer value and stored when the integer modifier is specified to be
an output value [S2].

Data table(linear table) (S2) Output (Y)


S2 = DT10, n = K10
S2: Registration mark (m) DT10
S2+1: x0 DT11 yn−1
S2+2: (real numerical value) DT12 yn−2
yn
S2+3: x1 DT13
S2+4: (real numerical value) DT14

S2+2n+1: xn DT29 Y=[D]


S2+2n+2: (real numerical value)
DT30
S2+2n+3: y0 DT31
y2
y1
S2+2n+4: (real numerical value)
DT32 y0 X=[S1]
S2+2n+5: y1 DT33
S2+2n+6: (real numerical value)
Input (X)
DT34 X0 X1 X2 Xn−2 Xn−1 Xn

S2+4n+3: yn DT49
S2+4n+4: (real numerical value) DT50

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007)(R9008):
− It turns on, when the specified address using the index modifier exceeds a limit.
− It turns on, when a non−real number value is inputted into [S1].
− In the registration mark of [S2], it turns on at the time of m<2 or m>99.
− It turns on, when a non−real number value is specified to be the real
numerical value (xt, yt) specified in [S2].
− It turns on, when the linear table of [S2] is not registered in ascending order
of the x−sequence.
− It turns on, when the linear table of [S2] exceeds the area.
− It turns on, when the overflow (operaion is unable) occurs in the operation of
scaling.
− It turns on, when integer modifier specification is carried out for [D] and an
output result exceeds the integer range.

3 − 760

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

5
F355 (PID) PID processing

Outline This instruction carries out PID processing using data table.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F355 (PID)
R0
DT 10
10 F355 PID, DT 10

S
S Starting number of PID parameter area (30 words)

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index
Operand register
modifier
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT I K H f
S N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
PID processing is performed to hold the measured value specified by S+2 at the set value S+1, and the result
is output to S+3.
Derivative control or proportional−derivative control can be selected for the PID processing mode.
Set the PID processing coefficients (proportional gain, integral time and derivative time) and the processing
mode and cycle in the parameter table. PID processing will be performed based on these settings.

Types of PID processing


Reverse operation and forward operation
When a process has been changed, the vertical direction of the output can be selected.
If the measured value drops, “Reverse operation” is specified to boost the output (heating, etc.).
If the measured value increases, “Forward operation” is specified to boost the output (cooling, etc.).

Derivative type (PI−D) / Proportional−derivative type (I−PD)


Generally, with “derivative PID control”, when a set value is changed, there is increased fluctuation in the
output, but convergence is faster.
Generally, with “proportional−derivative PID control”, when a set value is changed, there is less fluctuation in
the output, but convergence is slower.

next page

3 − 761

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The value set for the parameter is out of range.
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
Parameter table settings
[S] Control mode
[S+1] Set value (SP)
[S+2] Measured value (PV)
[S+3] Output value (MV)
[S+4] Output lower limit
[S+5] Output upper limit
[S+6] Proportional gain (Kp)
[S+7] Integral time (Ti)
[S+8] Derivative time (Td)
[S+9] Control cycle (Ts)
[S+10] Auto-tuning progress
[S+11]

PID processing work area (*)

[S+29]

* For the FP0 use the 20 words, [S+11] to [S+30], as the work area.

3 − 762

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Explanation of parameters
1 Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S]
Select the type of PID processing and auto-tuning on/off with the H constants.
Control mode Value of [S]
Auto−tuning Auto−tuning
when not executed when executed
Derivative type Reverse operation H0 H8000
Forward operation H1 H8001
Proportional− Reverse operation H2 H8002
derivative type
Forward operation H3 H8003

Auto-tuning
The optimum values for the Kp, Ti, and Td of the PID parameters can be measured by measuring the process
response. When auto tuning is executed, the estimated results are reflected in the parameter area after auto
tuning has been completed. (There may be cases in which auto tuning cannot be executed, depending on the
process. If this happens, processing returns to the original parameter operation.)
For precautions concerning execution of auto tuning, refer to the following page.
Reverse operation and forward operation
These parameters determine whether the output will increase or decrease when a change occurs in the
process.
Reverse operation
If the measured process value decreases, the output will increase. (Example: Heating)
Forward operation
If the measured process value increases, the output will increase. (Example: Cooling)
Derivative type PID and proportional−derivative type PID
When the set value is changed, the output changes.
Derivative type
In general this produces a large change when a set value is changed, however, convergence is fast.
Proportional−derivative type
In general this produces a small change when a set value is changed, however, convergence is slow.

2 Set value (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+1]


Set the target value which determines the amount of process control within the following range.
K0 to K10000
3 Measured value (PV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+2]

Input the current process control value with the A/D converter. Adjust so that it falls within the following range.
K0 to K10000
4 Output value (MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+3]

The result of PID processing is stored. Use the D/A converter or other device to output it to the process.
K0 to K10000
5 Output lower limit value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+4]

K0 to K9999 (< upper limit value)

3 − 763

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

6 Output upper limit value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+5]


K1 to K10000 (> lower limit value)
Specify the output value (MV) range. Values specified for the range are output.
The limits should be as follows:
0 output lower limit value < output upper limit value 10000.
7 Proportional gain (Kp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+6]
Specify the coefficient used for PID processing.
The set value × 0.1 will be the actual proportional gain.
The setting range is K1 to K9999 (0.1 to 999.9, specify in increments of 0.1)
If auto-tuning is selected for the specified control mode, the set value will be automatically
adjusted and rewritten.
8 Integral time (Ti) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+7]

Specify the coefficient used for PID processing.


The set value × 0.1 will be the actual integral time.
The setting range is K1 to K30000 (0.1 to 3000 seconds, specify in increments of 0.1 seconds)
When the set value is 0, the integration is not executed.
If auto-tuning is selected for the specified control mode, the set value will be automatically
adjusted and rewritten.
9 Derivative time (Td) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+8]

Specify the coefficient used for PID processing.


The set value × 0.1 will be the actual derivative time.
The setting range is K1 to K10000 (0.1 to 1000 seconds, specify in increments of 0.1 seconds)
If auto-tuning is selected for the specified control mode, the set value will be automatically
adjusted and rewritten.
10 Control cycle (Ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+9]

Set the cycle for executing PID processing. The set value × 0.01 will be the actual control period.
The setting range is K1 to K6000 (0.01 to 60.0 seconds, specify in increments of 0.01 seconds).
11 Auto-tuning progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+10]

If auto−tuning is specified in the control mode, the degree to which auto−tuning has progressed
is indicated. The values for K1 to K5 are stored based on the progress from the default value of 0,
and the values return to the default values when auto−tuning has been completed.
12 PID processing work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [S+11] to [S+29]

The system uses this work area to perform PID processing.


For the FP0 use the 20 words, [S+11] to [S+30], as the work area.

3 − 764

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precautions when executing auto−tuning


If “Execute auto−tuning” is specified using the parameter table (control mode [S]), attention should be paid to
the following points.
After auto−tuning has been completed, the control mode [S] area is automatically rewritten from H8000 to
H8003 to H0 to H3. Make sure the mode is not rewritten again in the program.
After auto−tuning has been completed, the optimum values are stored for the proportional gain (Kp), the
integration time (Ti) and derivative time (Td), but before executing auto−tuning, the appropriate values (for
example, the lower limit value) within the setting range must be set.
After auto−tuning has been completed, the optimum values are stored for the proportional gain (Kp), the
integration time (Ti) and derivative time (Td). Be careful that the stored values are not inadvertently rewritten.
Auto−tuning calculates the ideal Kp, Ti and Td values. This is done for setting (SP) by measuring the change
of the measured value (PV) when the output value (MV) is set to the upper limit so that the measured value
(PV) is caused to fluctuate, and measuring the change of the measured value (PV) when the output value
(MV) is set to the lower limit.
The changes of the output value (MV) when auto−tuning will complete after a minimum of three changes:
upper limit output−lower limit output−upper limit output. If the auto−tuning progress remains at 0 even after
changes have occurred several times, please try again after shortening control synchronization Ts.
Precautions during programming
A 30 word area (31 words for the FP0), including the operation work area, is required for the parameter table.
Be careful not to allow other instructions to overwrite values in this area.
Error detection will not occur even if the parameter table exceeds the area.
When specifying ”S” specify a number that is within at least 30 words (31 words for the FP0) from the last
number.
Take care that the area is not exceeded due to index modification. An error will not be detected if the area is
exceeded.
Use the A/D converter or other device to input the current measured value S+2.
Use the D/A converter or other device to output the result of PID processing S+3 to the process.
For the FP0, this instruction F355 (PID) cannot be programmed in the interrupt program.
If two or more PID instructions specifying the same table are described in the program, it may operate
incorrectly.
(Example)
X0
F355 PID, DT0

X0
F355 PID, DT0

(Reason)
Because the PID instructions are internally operating using the specified table, even if the execution
condition has not been effected.
In such a case, specify the table in separate addresses.

3 − 765

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Operation of PID control


PID is a control method widely used in the instrumentation field involving feedback control of process
quantities such as temperature, pressure, flow, and fluid level.
1) Proportional operation
Proportional operation generates an output which is proportional to the input.

Setting signal SV + Offset e


Kp Output MV

Measurement
signal PV
e Kp=2
MV 2

Kp=1
1 1
.5

0 t 0 t Kp=.5

The amount of control is held constant.


An offset remains.
Proportional control grows stronger as Kp is increased.

2) Integral operation
Integral operation generates an output which is proportional to the integral time of the input.

Setting signal SV + Offset e Integral


Output mi
− operation
Measurement
mi=1/Tiedt signal PV
e mi

In combination with proportional operation or proportional−derivative operation, integral operation removes


the offset produced by these methods.
Integral operation grows stronger as the integral time (Ti) is shortened.

3 − 766

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

3) Derivative operation
Derivative operation generates an output which is proportional to the derivative time of the input.

Setting signal SV + Offset e Derivative


Output mD
− operation
Measurement
de signal PV
mD=TD・
dt
e mD

The advancing characteristic of derivative control alleviates the adverse effect which the delaying
characteristic of the process exerts on control.
Derivative control grows stronger as the derivative time (Td) is increased.
In the case of pure derivative operation, control can temporarily become ineffective if noise is input, and this
can have an adverse effect on the process being controlled. For this reason, incomplete differential operation
is executed.

e mD

4) PID operation
PID operation is a combination of proportional, integral, and derivative operation.

+
Setting signal SV + Offset e Integral + Output MV
Kp
− operation +

Derivative
Measurement signal PV
operation

If the parameters are set to the optimum values, PID control can quickly bring the amount of control to the
target value and maintain it there.

3 − 767

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

5 Availability

F356 (EZPID) Easy PID FP−X: Ver 1.20 or more


FPΣ: 32k/FP0R

Outline Temperature control (PID) can be easily performed using the image of a
temperature controller.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction

10 ST R 1
Trigger
11 F356(EZPID)
WR1
R1 Y0
WX2
10 F356 EZPID, WR1, WX2, DT32710, DT100
DT32710
DT100
S1 S2 S3 S4
21 OT Y 0

S1 Control data
S2 Measured value (PV)
S3 Starting No. of area storing PID control parameter
S4 Starting No. of PID processing work area

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant
register Index
Operand SWR SDT
In modifier
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD K H
(*1)

S1 N/A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A −

S2 A A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A −

S3 N/A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A −

S4 N/A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A −

(*1) I0 to ID. A: Available


N/A: Not Available
Operation
PID processing is performed to hold the measured value (PV) at the set value (SP).
Writing OUT instruction immediately after this instruction enables the PWM output (on−off output) similar to a
temperature controller.
Auto−tuning function is also available to calculate the control parameter of PID automatically.
It can be used with analog output as it outputs values as well as PWM output.

3 − 768

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

General explanation of used memories


S1: It is recommended to specify the non−hold type area (e.g. WR) where can be operated in bit unit.
When bit0 is 1, it is auto−tuning request. This bit is reset with this instruction when auto−tuning has
completed.
Reset this bit to cancel auto−tuning.
When bit0 is 0, it is PID control.
When auto−tuning has completed successfully, 1 is set for bit 1.
Bit2 turns on to hold the output MV (S4) when the execution condition of this instruction changes from
off to on.
When bit3 is 0, it is PWM control. And when bit3 is 1, it is ANALOG output control.
When bit4 is 0, the max. value of the internal output is the output upper limit value +20% of the output
range (output upper limit value − output lower limit value), and the min. value is the output lower limit
value −20% of the output range.
When bit4 is 1, the max. value of the internal output is the output upper limit value, and the min. value
is the output lower limit value.
*The output lower limit value is specified by S4+1, and the output upper limit value is specified by
S4+2.
Bits 5 to F are reservation bits. Normally use them as 0.
S2: Area storing measured value (PV) (1 word) Affective range
The input WXn of a temperature input unit can be directly specified. k−30000 to k+30000
S3: Area to specify target value (SP) and control parameter (4 words)
It is recommended to use this area allocating to the hold−type operation Setting range
memory.
S3: Store set value (SP). It is necessary to specify by the k−30000 to k+30000
instruction or an indicator.
S3+1: Store proportional gain (KP). After auto−tuning has been com- k1 to K9999 (0.1 to
Actual gain is Set value x 0.1. pleted, it is automatically set. 999.9)
S3+2: Store integral time (TI). After auto−tuning has been com- k0 to k30000 (0 to
Actual integral time is Set val- pleted, it is automatically set. 3000s)
ue x 0.1.
S3+3: S3+3: Store derivative time After auto−tuning has been com- k0 to k10000 (0 to
(TD). pleted, it is automatically set. 1000s)
Actual derivative time is Set
value x 0.1.
S4: It is divided into output (MV), specified area of control mode, auto−tuning related area and PID proc-
essing work area.
The area in the range of S4 to S4+29 is necessary for the instruction. (The detail is described herein-
below.)
It is recommended to allocate it in the non−hold area. Also, do not use the data in this area for other
purposes.

Easy usage
When PWM output in reverse operation (heating)

R0 R10
( DF ) S Auto−tuning request

R1 Y0
F356(EZPID), WR1, WX2, DT32710, DT100 Easy PID control

3 − 769

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Explanation of operation
Specify set value (SP) with the instruction or an indicator before the operation.
If auto−tuning is requested with a device such as indicator, the above auto−tuning request program is not
necessary.
When R1 turns on, work area DT100 to DT129 will be initialized. (However, only DT100 (MV) can be held.)
The control conditions are that operation cycle is 1 sec, derivative type reverse operation (heating), and
PWM resultion is 1000.
PID control starts from the next scan, and PWM output is executed for Y0.
Note) If execution condition R1 has turned off during PID control, PWM output Y0 also turns off. However,
output value MV is held.
Program as described above to start auto−tuning with the instruction, and turn on R1 after turning on R0.
When auto−tuning has completed successfully, R11 turns on and KP, TI and TD is set.
If R1 is on continuously, it will change to PID control automatically, and PWM output will be executed for Y0.
When changing control conditions
The area of S4+1 to S4+9 must be changed to change control conditions. Change it before the second
execution of the F356 instruction.
<Details of S4>
S4: It is divided into output (MV), specified area of control mode, auto−tuning related area and PID
processing work area. It is recommended to allocate it in the non−hold area. Also, do not use the data in
this area for other purposes.
Output (MV) and control mode area
(Normally, the default values are used.) Default value Range
S4: The output value (MV) of PID processing is stored. k0 k−10000 to 10000
S4+1: Set the lower limit value of output value (MV). k0 Min. k−10000
S4+2: Set the upper limit value of output value (MV). k10000 Max. k+10000
S4+3: Set 100% output band (range where PID control is not performed). k0 k0 to 80(%)
S4+4: Set control cycle (TS). Setting unit=10ms, default value=1sec. k100 k1 to 3000(0.01 to 30s)
S4+5: Set control mode. (Refer to the table below.) k0 k0 to 3

Control mode Val- e.g. Reverse operation and forward operation


ue Reverse operation: If the measured value drops, “Reverse
Derivative type Reverse k0 Heating operation” is specified to boost the output (heating, etc).
Forward operation: If the measured value increases, “Forward
Forward k1 Cooling
operation” is specified to boost the output (cooling, etc.).
Proportional− Reverse k2 Heating
Derivative type (PI−D)/Proportional−derivative type (I−PD)
derivative type
Forward k3 Cooling Derivated type: The speed is faster to get to set value, but it is
easily overshooted.
Proportional−derivative type: The speed is slow to get to set
value, but it is not easily overshooted.

Auto−tuning related area (The default value is normally used.)


S4+6: Set bias value for performing auto−tuning. k0 from k0
S4+7: Set correction data (a1) of auto−tuning result (KP). k125 k50 to k500%
S4+8: Set correction data (a2) of auto−tuning result (TI). k200 k50 to k500%
S4+9: Set correction data (a3) of auto−tuning result (TD). k100 k50 to k500%
S4+10: The status while auto−tuning is being performed is stored. k0 k0 to k5
PID processing work area
S4+11: The area up to S4+29 is 0
to the work area for PID processing and auto−tuning processing. to
S4+29: 0

3 − 770

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Note) The default value is written when the execution condition turns on.
Output (MV) is output only in the ranges of upper limit value and lower limit value.
“Also, set to be as −1000 lower limit value < upper limit value 10000.”
How to output PWM.
The cycle of a PWM output is decided by the setting value of S4+4. The default value is periodic 1 second.
Duty of PWM is decided by the rate of the output MV (S4) that accounts for in the range of k0 to k10000.
When either on of the minimum value and maximum value of Output MV specified by S4+1 and S4+2 is a
negative value, the PWM output is always OFF.
A PWM output is always ON, when the output MV is k0, and it is always OFF when the output MV is k10000.
Explanation of specific usage
1: When changing control mode only with PWM output
Change the content of the control mode (S4+5) to k1 to k3 using an instruction such as F0(MV)
instruction.
(Example) Change the control mode to the proportional derivative type from the derivative type that is
the default.

R1 Y0
F356 EZPID , WR1, WX2, DT32710, DT100

R1
F0 MV , K2 , DT105

2: When using an analog output unit for output


2−1: Set the bit3 of S1 to 1 in order to start ANALOG output control.

2−2: Set output lower limit value (S4+1) and output upper limit value (S4+2) according to the output
range of an analog output unit.
(Example) <Lower limit value=k0, upper limit value=k2000>, <Lower limit value=k0, upper limit
value=k4000>
2−3: Change the value of control cycle (TS): (S4+4) according to the cycle of updating input of a
temperature input unit (that is normaly 0.15 or more).
(Example) TS=k10 (100ms)

2−4: Change the control mode if necessary.

2−5: Transmit output value (MV) to WY of an analog output unit.

3 − 771

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Note) When analog output is used for output, it is not necessary to write OUT instruction immediately after
this instruction.
Also, when analog output is used, PWM output is fixed to off.
(Example) When controlling with the settings that the output upper value (S4+2) is K4000 and the
control cycle (S4+4) is 10 seconds

R1 R3
S

R1
F356 EZPID , WR1, WX2, DT32710, DT100

R1
( DF ) F0 MV , K4000 , DT102

F0 MV , K1000 , DT104

R1
F0 MV , DT100 , WYn

More detail on setting method


1: Setting for 100% output band (S4+3)
100% output band is to specify the timing of starting PID control when measured value (PV) becomes
more than what percentage of set value.
100% output is performed in the area up to a specified measured value.
When measured value (PV) is smaller than set value (SP) *this setting, it has affect on reducing the
arrival time to set value (SP) by performing 100% output.
Therefore, when it is set to k80, 100% output is performed up to 80% of set value (SP), and PID control
starts from then.
When k0 has been set to the default value for this setting, PID control is performed from the beginning.
2: Fine adjustment of auto−tuning
2−1: Correction of the result of auto−tuning (S4+7, S4+8 and S4+9)
When auto−tuning has completed, the parameters for KP, TI and TD are stored in (S3+1, S3+2 and
S3+3).
That result can be corrected with this parameter.
(Example)
Set S4+7 to k200 (means to 200%) and perform auto−tuning to correct KP to double value.
Set S4+8 to K128 (means to 125%) and perform auto−tuning to correct TI to 1.25 times value.
Set S4+9 to k75 (means to 75%) and perform auto−tuning to correct TD to 0.75 times value.

3 − 772

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

2−1: Auto−tuning bias value (S4+6)


Auto−tuning is executed with (set value (SP) − auto−tuning bias value) as a set value (SP’).
It is used to control excessive temperature rise while auto−tuning is performed.
For the forward operaiton, auto−tuning is executed with (set value (SP) + this set value) as a set value.

Temperature

Set value
(SP)
Auto−tuning bias value

(SP’) Auto−tuning in reverse operation

Time

During auto−tuning PID control


KP, TI and TD calculation

Temperature

(SP’) Auto−tuning in forward operation

Auto−tuning bias value

Set value
(SP)

Time

During auto−tuning PID control


KP, TI and TD calculation

Note) Even if starting auto−tuning in the condition that measured value (PV) is close to set value (SP),
auto−tuning is peformed with the above SP’.

3 − 773

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precautions on programming
1: When the execution condition has turned on, the area of S4 to S4+29 is initialized.
If it is set to values other than the default values, write with F0(MV) instruction using always on relay
R9010 as execution condition.
2: As operation cycle or timing of PWM output is always operated internally with PID processing instruction,
always operate only once in 1 scan.
Therefore, do not execute it during the subroutin or interrupt program.
This insturction that the same operand has been specified cannot be written more than once.
3: Do not turn off the execution condition during PID processing. Otherwise, PID processing will be
disabled.
4: If you do not want to synchronize PWM output cycle for controlling multiple objects, delay the timing of
start−up by adjusting times such as the rise time for start−up condition.
5: As execution condition is changed after executing this instruction, after instructions cannot operate
correctly with the program below.
R1 Y0
Incorrect F356 EZPID, WR1, WX2, DT32710, DT100
F0 MV, k0, DT100

R1 Y0
F356 EZPID, WR1, WX2, DT32710, DT100
Correct R1 It is the same as if there is no
OT Y0 instruction.
F0 MV, k0, DT100

Conditions when operation errors occur


1: S2: Measured value (PV), S3: Set value (SP), S3+1: KP, S3+2: TI, S3+3: TD
When each parameter of S4+1 to S4+9 is out of the setting range.
2: When the area specified with S3 or S4 exceeds the upper limit of the specified operation device.
Internal operation specifications
When the execution condition has turned on, the operation work is initialized.
If each parameter of KP, TI and TD is all 0 when PID operation has started, they are initialized at 1,1 and 0,
respectively. And the operation is continued.
AT normal done flag or AT done code is cleared on the leading edge of AT signal.
The set value for AT operates regarding <set value (SP) − bias value> as target value. Default value for bias
value is 0.
When AT has completed successfully, the results which is calculated by raising KP, TI and TD of calculated
results to the power of correction data a1, a2 and a3 are stored. Default value is 100%.
When AT has completed successfully, AT normal done falg is set, and AT done code is stored in AT step.
When AT has abended, the parameters of KP, TI and TD are not changed.
PWM output is output at the duty when the output range of MV is 0 to 10000.
For analog output (when bit3 of S1 is 1), the internal calculated value output in the range of 0 to 10000 and it is
converted into a specified range.
Conversion formula: (Upper limit value − Lower limit value) x internal caluculated value / 10000 + Lower limit
value
Example) When upper limit value = 40000, lower limit value = 0 and internal calculated value = 5000, output
value is 2000.

3 − 774

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precautions when using MV holding function · · · · The usage varies according to


models and versions.
1. For FPΣ, FP−X, FP0R (V1.05 or older)
Use the default upper limit and lower limit values for using the MV holding function.
2. For FP0R (V1.06 or later)
Upper limit and lower limit values are held as well as MV value, set MV value, upper limit and lower limit
values before executing this instruction.

3 − 775

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F373 (DTR) 16-bit data revision detection


P373 (PDTR)
Outline This instruction detects changes in 16-bit data values.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F373 (DTR)
R0
10 F373 DTR, DT10, DT20 DT 10
DT 20

Trigger S D 17 ST R 0
18 AN R9009
R0 R9009 R10 20 OT R 10

17

S 16-bit area for detecting data changes.


D Area where data of previous execution is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Explanation of example
When the trigger R0 turns on, R9009 will turn on if there has been a change in data register DT10 since the
previous execution. Following this, the internal relay R10 will also turn on.
Description
If the data in the 16-bit area specified by S has changed since the previous execution, internal relay R9009
(carry flag) will turn on.
D is used to store the data of the previous execution, and when the current execution has been completed,
the current data is stored in D.

3 − 776

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precautions during programming


The internal relay R9009 (carry flag) used for detection of data changes is updated at each execution of the
instruction.
For this reason,
Programs using R9009 should insert it immediately after an F373 (DTR)/P373 (PDTR) instruction.
Output to an output relay or internal relay to hold the result. (Refer to the explanation of F64 (BCMP)/P64
(PBCMP).)
As in the program example on preceding page, be sure to add the trigger (X10) for the F373 (DTR)/P373
(PDTR) instruction before the internal relay R9009 (carry flag).
If the always on relay (R9010) is the execution condition, this trigger (X10) is not necessary.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on if a change has occurred in the specified data area.

3 − 777

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F374 (DDTR) 32-bit data revision detection


P374 (PDDTR)
Outline This instruction detects changes in 32-bit data values.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F374 (DDTR)
R0
10 DT 10
F374 DDTR, DT10, DT20
DT 20

S D 17 ST R 0
Trigger
18 AN R9009
R0 R9009 R10 20 OT R 10

17

S Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data for detecting data changes.


D Lower 16-bit area of 32-bit data where data of previous execution is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

S A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A


D N/A A A A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Explanation of example
When the trigger R0 turns on, R9009 will turn on if there has been a change in data register DT10 since the
previous execution. Following this, the internal relay R10 will also turn on.
Description
If the data in the 32-bit area specified by S has changed since the previous execution, internal relay R9009
(carry flag) will turn on.
D+1 and D is used to store the data of the previous execution, and when the current execution has been
completed, the current data is stored in D+1 and D.

3 − 778

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Precautions during programming


The internal relay R9009 (carry flag) used for detection of data changes is updated at each execution of the
instruction.
For this reason,
Programs using R9009 should insert it immediately after an F374 (DDTR)/P374 (PDDTR) instruction.
Output to an output relay or internal relay to hold the result. (Refer to the explanation of F64 (BCMP)/P64
(PBCMP).)
As in the program example on preceding page, be sure to add the trigger (X10) for the F374 (DDTR)/P374
(PDDTR) instruction before the internal relay R9009 (carry flag).
If the always on relay (R9010) is the execution condition, this trigger (X10) is not necessary.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when the area specified using the index modifier
exceeds the limit.
・Carry flag (R9009): Turns on if a change has occurred in the specified data area.

3 − 779

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F410 (SETB) Setting the index register bank number


P410 (PSETB)
Outline Setting the index register bank number
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F410 (SETB)
R0
K 1
10 F410 SETB, K 1

n
n Constant data or area where register bank number is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

n A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
This instruction selects the current index register bank number.

Precautions during programming


The bank number is automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the starting address of the program.
If the program memory is 120K steps, when the program is switched to the No. 1 program or the No. 2
program, the index register bank number is automatically set to 0.

3 − 780

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
Changing the index register banks
0
I0 to ID of
1
bank 0
R9010
F410 SETB,
SETB, HH11

2
I0 to ID of
bank 1

R9010
F410 SETB, H 2

3 I0 to ID of
bank 2

R9010
F410 SETB, H 3

I0 to ID of
bank 3

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− The bank number is not from K0 to K15.

3 − 781

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F411 (CHGB) Changing the index register bank number


P411 (PCHGB)
Outline Index register bank number change over with remembering preceding
bank number.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F411 (CHGB)
R0
K 2
10 F411 CHGB, K2

n
n Constant data or area where register bank number is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

n A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
This instruction selects the current index register bank number.
At this time, the current index bank number is stored in the push area (the push area has only one effective
level, thus previous data is overwritten).
The bank numbers of index registers used in interrupt programs, subroutines, and other sub programs
should be specified in such a way that the F411 (CHGB) instruction is executed at the beginning of the sub
program, and the F412 (POPB) instruction is executed at the end of the sub program.

Precautions during programming


The bank number is automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the starting address of the program.
If the program memory is 120K steps, when the program is switched to the No. 1 program or the No. 2
program, the index register bank number is automatically set to 0.
The push area has only one effective level, thus the previous data is overwritten.

3 − 782

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

Program example
This is a program in which the index register bank is switched to “2” at the beginning of the interrupt program,
and is then switched back again to the original index register bank just before the end of the interrupt program
(before the IRET instruction).

Main program

END

INT 0
R9010
F411 CHGB, H2
Sub program

R9010
F412 POPB

IRET

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− The bank number is not from K0 to K15.

3 − 783

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F412 (POPB) Restoring the index register bank number


P412 (PPOPB)
Outline Changes index register bank number back to the bank before F411
(CHGB)/P411 (PCHGB) instructions.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F412 (POPB)
R0
10 F412 POPB

Description
The current index register bank number is changed to the number stored in the push area.
The contents of the push area are not changed at this time.
The bank numbers of index registers used in interrupt programs, subroutines, and other sub programs
should be specified in such a way that the F411 (CHGB) instruction is executed at the beginning of the sub
program, and the F412 (POPB) instruction is executed at the end of the sub program.

Precautions during programming


The bank number is automatically set to bank 0 before execution of the starting address of the program.
If the program memory is 120K steps, when the program is switched to the No. 1 program or the No. 2
program, the index register bank number is automatically set to 0.
The push area has only one effective level.

Program example
This is a program in which the index register bank is switched to “2” at the beginning of the interrupt program,
and is then switched back again to the original index register bank just before the end of the interrupt program
(before the IRET instruction).

Main program

END

INT 0
R9010
F411 CHGB, H2
Sub program

R9010
F412 POPB

IRET

3 − 784

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F414 (SBFL) Setting the file register bank number


P414 (PSBFL)
Outline Setting the file register bank number
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F414 (SBFL)
R0
DT 1
10 F414 SBFL, DT 1

n
n Constant data or area where register bank number is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

n A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
This instruction selects the current file register bank number.
File register bank number: 0 to 2.

Precautions during programming


The file register bank is set to bank 0 at the first step of program.
The file register bank is also set to bank 0 at the first step of No. 2 program.
Special data register for file register bank.
DT90263 File register bank (current value) The current value of file register bank is stored.
stored
DT90264 File register bank (shelter number) The shelter number of file register bank is stored.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− The bank number is not from K0 to K2.

3 − 785

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F415 (CBFL) Changing the file register bank number


P415 (PCBFL)
Outline Changing the file register bank number.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST X 10
11 F415 (CBFL)
X10
DT 1
10 F415 CBFL, DT 1

n
n Constant data or area where register bank number is stored.

Operands
Index
Relay Timer/Counter Register Constant Index Integer
Operand register
modifier device
WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD FL I K H f

n A A A A A A A A A A A A N/A A N/A
A: Available
N/A: Not Available
Description
This instruction selects the current file register bank number.
At this time, the current file bank number is stored in the push area (the push area has only one effective level,
thus previous data is overwritten).
File register bank number: 0 to 2.
Precautions during programming
The file register bank is set to bank 0 at the first step of program.
The file register bank is also set to bank 0 at the first step of No. 2 program.
Special data register for file register bank.
DT90263 File register bank (current value) The current value of file register bank is stored.
stored
DT90264 File register bank (shelter number) The shelter number of file register bank is stored.

Flag conditions
・Error flag (R9007): Turns on and stays on when:
・Error flag (R9008): Turns on for an instant when:
− The area specified using the index modifier exceeds the limit.
− The bank number is not from K0 to K2.

3 − 786

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

F416 (PBFL) Restoring the file register bank number


P416 (PPBFL)
Outline Changes file register bank number back to the bank before F415
(CBFL)/P415 (PCBFL) instructions.
Program example
Boolean
Ladder Diagram
Address Instruction
Trigger 10 ST R 0
11 F416 (PBFL)
R0
10 F416 PBFL

Description
The current file register bank number is changed to the number stored in the push area. The contents of the
push area are not changed at this time.
The user must manage the push area data so that the desired data is restored. This instruction only checks
the data range, it does not check changes made with the F415 (CBFL) instruction.
The push area has only one effective level.

Precautions during programming


The file register bank is set to bank 0 at the first step of program.
The file register bank is also set to bank 0 at the first step of No. 2 program.
Special data register for file register bank.
DT90263 File register bank (current value) The current value of file register bank is stored.
stored
DT90264 File register bank (shelter number) The shelter number of file register bank is stored.

3 − 787

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


High−level Instructions

3 − 788

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Chapter 4

Precautions Concerning Programs

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4-2

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.1 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

4.1 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

4.1.1 Method of Rewriting Constant in the Program

Timer set value This method rewrites the


value in the program.
X0 TMX5, K 30

T5 Y10

Changing the set values (constants) in the program


Constants in the program can be rewritten as long as the following conditions are
observed.
Operation method: RAM operation only
Rewriting method: Method using the programming tool software
Method using the FP Programmer II
Rewrite method using the programming tool software
Example of changing the set value of timer 5 from K30 to K50
1. Place the cursor on the value of K30 set for the timer 0.
2. Press the “Delete” key of computer to clear the value.
3. Enter a new constant of K50, and press the “Enter” key.

Rewrite method using FP programmer II


Example of changing the set value of timer 5 from K30 to K50
1. Read the address containing the timer instruction.
SHIFT TM ST SRC READ READ
5
SC T-SV X-WX

2. Clear the constant (K30).


(HELP)
CLR

3. Enter the new constant (K50).


(BIN)
5 0 WRT
K/H

4-3

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Operation and cautions after the change


After the change using the programming tool software or FP programmer II, the timer
or counter in operation will continue to run. Operation based on the changed set value
will be start the next time the execution condition changes from off to on.
If changing values using the boolean (ladder/non−ladder) mode input method available
in the programming tool software, subtraction is interrupted when the values are
rewritten, and starts again with the new value, starting from the next scan.
When method of constant rewriting in the program is used, the program itself will
change. Thus, when the mode is changed and then set back to RUN or when the power
is turned on, the changed set value will be preset.

4-4

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.1 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

4.1.2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area

Transfers to SV area when mode


changes to RUN mode.
Timer set value
SV5
X0 TMX5, K30
30

T5 Y10
This method rewrites the value
in the set value area. The
program itself is not rewritten.

Changing values in the set value area SV


Values in the set value area SV can be changed with the following conditions.
Operation method: RAM operation, ROM operation
Rewriting method: Method using the programming tool software
Method using the FP Programmer II
Method using the program (high−level instruction)
Operation and cautions after the change
After the change, the timer or counter in operation will continue to run. Operation based
on the changed set value will be start the next time the execution condition changes
from off to on.
With these methods, the value in the set value area SV will change, however, the
program itself will not change. Therefore, when the mode is changed and then set back
to RUN or when the power is turned on, operation will take place as follows:
When a set value in the program is specified by a constant K
The constant K is preset in the set value area SV. After the change, it will no longer be
effective.
When a set value in the program is specified by a set value area number
In the case of a non−hold type timer or counter, 0 is preset in the set value area SV. In the
case of a hold type timer or counter, the value changed by the method on the following
page is preset in the set value area SV.

4-5

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Method 1: Method using the programming tool software


Select “MONITOR & TEST RUN” from the online menu, read the set value area SV of
the timer or counter using the data monitor, and change the value.

Method 2: Method using the FP Programmer II


Use the word data monitor function to read the set value area SV of the timer or counter
to be changed, and rewrite the value.
Example of changing the value of SV0 from K30 to K50.
1. Execute word data monitor (OP8).
(−)
8 ENT
OP

2. Read SV0.
TM READ
0
T-SV

3. Clear SV0.
(HELP)
CLR

4. Write the new changing value.


(BIN)
5 0 WRT
K/H

4-6

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.1 Changing the Set Value of Timer/Counter During RUN

Method 3: Method using the program (high−level instruction)


To change a set value of timer/counter based on an input condition, use a high-level
instruction as shown below to rewrite the value in the set value area SV of the desired
timer or counter.

Example: Changing the set value to K20 when input X0 turns on


X0
F0 MV, K20, SV3

X1 TMX3 K50
When X0 turns on, the set value of timer
changes from 5 seconds to 2 seconds.
T3 Y10

With the FP2SH and FP10SH, it is possible to specify the data register DT, as well the
relay WR for handling word data, and other similar areas, as the set value area. The set
value can be changed by changing the value to be transmitted, using the F0 (MV)
instruction or a similar instruction.

4-7

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.2 Use of Duplicated Output

4.2.1 Duplicated Output


Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a program.
If the same output is specified for the “OT” and “KP” instructions, it is considered to
be duplicated output.
Even if the same output is used for multiple application instructions, such as the SET
or RST instruction, or high−level instruction for data transfer, it is not regarded as
duplicated output.
If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, under normal
conditions, it will be flagged as an error. The ERROR (ERROR/ALARM) LED will light
and the self-diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on.

How to check for duplicated use


You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool, by the
following method:
Using FP Programmer II:
Operate the TOTAL CHECK function.
(Key operation: )
(−) READ
9 ENT
OP

If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message (DUP USE) and the address will
be displayed.
Using programming tool software (NPST-GR):
Excute the “TOTALLY CHECK A PROGRAM” on “CHECK A PROGRAM.”
If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message (DUPLICATED OUTPUT
ERROR) and the address will be displayed. If you execute “SEARCH AN ERROR,” the
error message will be displayed, and the first address number will be displayed.
Enabling Duplicated Output
If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program, duplicated
output can be enabled.
In this case, change the setting of system register 20 to “enable” (when using FP
programmer II, set K1).
When this is done, an error will not occur when the program is executed.

4-8

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.2 Use of Duplicated Output

4.2.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET, or RST Instruction

Condition of internal and output relays during operation


When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such
as transfer instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are
rewritten at each step during operation.

Example: Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to
X2 are all on).

X0 R0
S

R0
This section of the program is
processed as if R0 were on.

X1 R0
R

The program is processed as if


R0 were off.

X2 R0

The program is processed as if


R0 were on.

The output is determined by the final operation results.


If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST, or data
transfer instructions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the results
of the operation at the greatest program address.

Example: Output to the same output relay Y10 with OT, SET and RST
instructions.

X0 Y10
Y10: on
X1 Y10
S Y10: on

X2 Y10
R Y10: off

When X0 to X2 are all on, Y10 is output as off at I/O update


according to the result of trigger X2.
If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update
instruction F143 (IORF).

4-9

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.3 Leading Edge Detection Method

4.3.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method


Instructions using the leading edge detection operation:
− DF (leading edge differential) instructions
− Count input for CT instructions
− Count input for F118 (UDC) instructions
− Shift input for SR instructions
− Shift input for F119 (LRSR) instructions
− NSTP instructions
− P type high−level instructions (with the prefix “P”) for
FP−C/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH only
Leading edge detection method
An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where
its trigger is detected switching from off to on.

Standard operation Leading edge detection operation


on on
Trigger off Trigger off

on on
Operation of off Operation of off
instruction instruction
Executed only one time
Executed every scan
The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are
compared, and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the
current condition is on. In any other case, the instruction is not executed.

4 - 10

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.3 Leading Edge Detection Method

Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection


When RUN begins, for example when the system is powered on, the off → on change
of the trigger is not detected. The instruction is not executed. Execution of the
instruction will take place as explained on the following page.
When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions below which change
the order of execution of instructions, the operation of the instruction may change
depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.
Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions,
such as:
− MC and MCE instructions
− JP and LBL instructions
− F19 (SJP) and LBL instructions for FP−C/FP2/FP2SH/FP3/FP10SH only
− LOOP and LBL instructions
− CNDE instruction
− Step ladder instructions
− Subroutine instructions

4.3.2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time


Operation of first scan after RUN begins
The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been
switched to the RUN mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if
the execution condition is already on.
RUN
(Power on)

Trigger

Operation

Not executed Executed

If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior
to switching to RUN mode, use the special internal relay R9014 in your program as
follows. (R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on
at the second scan.)

next page

4 - 11

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Example 1: DF (leading edge differential) instruction

X0 Y10
DF

Add R9014

X0 R9014 Y10
DF

RUN
(Power on)

X0

Y10

Even if X0 was initially on, the input condition for the


DF instruction is off−to−on at the second scan,
therefore differential output is obtained.

Example 2: CT (counter) instruction

X0
CT 200
X1

Add R9014

X0 R9014
CT 200

X1

RUN
(Power on)

X0

CT200
counting
operation Even if X0 was initially on, the input condition
for the counter is off−to−on at the second scan,
therefore the count is incremented.

4 - 12

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.3 Leading Edge Detection Method

4.3.3 Precautions when Using a Control Instruction

Instructions which leading edge detection compare the condition of the previous
execution and the condition of the current execution, and execute the instruction only
if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on. In any other case, the
instruction is not executed.
When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes
the order of instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the
instruction may change as follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this
point.

Example 1: Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions


X0
MC 0
X1 Y10
DF

MCE 0

Time chart 1

X0

X1

Y10

Previous
execution of The input condition (X1) for the DF
DF instruction instruction has not changed since the
time of the previous execution, thus
differential output is not obtained.

Time chart 2

X0

X1

Y10

Previous
execution of The input condition (X1) for the DF
DF instruction instruction has changed from off to on
since the time of the previous execution,
thus differential output is obtained.

4 - 13

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Example 2: Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions


R0
JP 1
X0
CT 200

X1

LBL 1
Time chart 1

R0

X0

Counting
operation

Final timing at
which the The count is not incremented, because
previous JP the final timing at which the previous JP
instruction was instruction was not executed has not
not executed been changed, and the execution
condition X0 for the counter input has
Time chart 2 not changed.

R0

X0

Counting
operation

Final timing at
which the The count is incremented, because the
previous JP count input changed from off to on after the
instruction final timing at which the previous JP
was not instruction was not executed.
executed

4 - 14

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.4 Operation Errors

4.4 Operation Errors

4.4.1 Operation Errors


An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high-level
instruction is executed.
When an operation error occurs, the ERROR LED will light (for FP0, ERROR/ALARM
LED will blink), and the operation error flags (R9007 and R9008) will turn on.
The operation error code K45 (H2D) is set at special data register DT9000/DT90000.
The error address is stored in special data registers DT9017 and DT9018/DT90017 and
DT90018.
− With the FP0 C10, C14, C16, C32/FP−e, the self−diagnosis error codes are
stored in DT9000, and addresses at which errors occurred are stored in
DT9017 and DT9018.
− With the FP0R/FP0 T32C/FPΣ/FP−X/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, the self−diagnosis
error codes are stored in DT90000, and addresses at which errors occurred
are stored in DT90017 and DT90018.
Types of operation error
Address error
The memory address (number) specified by index modification is outside the area which
can be used
BCD data error
Operation is attempted on non−BCD data when an instruction handling BCD data is
executed, or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible
conversion range.
Parameter error
In an instruction requiring the specification of control data, the specified data is outside
the possible range.
Over area error
The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range.

4 - 15

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.4.2 Operation Mode when an Operation Error Occurs

Normally, the operation stops when an operation error occurs.


However, when you set system register 26 to “continuation” (K1), the CPU operates
even if an operation error occurs.
System registers are specified as described below.
Using programming tool software
1. Set the mode of the CPU to PROG.
2. Select the “Option” in “PLC Configuration” option from the menu.
3. On the “PLC Configuration” menu, select “Action on error”. This
displays system registers 20 to 28.
4. The check of system register 26 is removed.
5. Press the “OK” to write the setting to the PLC.
Using FP programmer II Ver. 2
1. Set the mode of the CPU to PROG.
2. Press the keys on the FP programmer II, as shown below.
(−)
ACLR 5 0 ENT
OP

3. Specify the register number (26) for the parameter to be set and read
the parameter.
The value set in the selected system register 26 will be displayed.
READ
2 6

4. To change a set value, press the (HELP) “CLR” key and write the K1
parameter.

4 - 16

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.4 Operation Errors

4.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors

Procedure:
1. Check the location of the error.
Check the address where the error occurred, which is stored in DT9017
and DT9018 or in DT90017 and DT90018, and make sure the application
instruction for that address is correct and appropriate.
2. Clear the error.
Use a programming tool to clear the error. (If the mode selector is set to
RUN, RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared.)
In the “STATUS DISPLAY” menu of the programming tool software
(NPST−GR Ver. 3.1 or later), press the “F3” key.
In FP Programmer II, press the following keys.
(−) SHIFT (DELT)
ACLR 1 1 2 ENT
OP SC INST

An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode,
however, the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data
will be cleared.
An error can also be cleared by executing the self-diagnostic error set
instruction F148 (ERR).

4 - 17

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.4.4 Points to Check in Program

This is an example of a program in which an operation error is likely to occur.


Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register.
When a data register is modified using an index register
X0
F0 MV, DT0, IXDT0

In this case, index register (IX) modifies the address of data register DT0. If data in IX
is larger than the last address of the data register, an operation error will occur. The
same is true when the contents of IX are negative value.
Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD e BIN data conversion?
When BCD−to−BIN conversion is attempted
X0
F81 BIN, DT0, DT100

In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F
such as 12A4, the data conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result.
When BIN−to−BCD conversion is attempted
X0
F80 BCD, DT1, DT101

In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999, an
operation error will occur.
Check if the divisor of a division instruction is K0.
X0
F32 %, DT0, DT100, DT200

In this case, if the content of DT100 is K0, an operation error will occur.

4 - 18

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.5 Handling Index Registers

4.5 Handling Index Registers

4.5.1 Index Registers


Index registers are used for indirect specification of values to number (addresses) and
operands in relays and memory areas. (This is also called “index modification”.)
Add the index register to the relay, memory area, or constant you want to modify, and
then write the modifying value (16-bit data) to the index register. The FP0 and FP−e
have two points, IX and IY. The FP0R, FPΣ, FP−X, FP2, FP2SH and FP10SH have 14
points, I0 to ID.
To modify a 32-bit constant, write the 32-bit data to two words of the index register.

Example: Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number


specified by the contents of an index register.
X0
F0 MV, DT100, IXDT0

Base memory area

In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the
contents of IX with DT0 acting as a base. For example, when IX is K10, the destination
will be DT10, and when IX is K20, the destination will be DT20.
In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single
instruction, and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts
of data.
Changing banks in an index register of the FP2SH and FP10SH makes it possible to
increase the number of points used in a program from 14 to a maximum of 224 (14
points, 16 banks).
Bank Bank Bank Bank
0 1 2 F
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
IA
IB
IC
ID

4 - 19

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.5.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers

Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data
registers DT.
IXWX0, IXWY1, IXWR0, IXSV0, IXEV2, I0WX10, I2WY1, I3WR0, IASV0, IBEV2

Constants can also be modified.


IXK10, IXH1001

In the FP2SH/FP10SH, the relay numbers can be modified.


I0X0, IAR10

In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, an index register can be modified using another index


register.
In the FP0/FP−e, an index register cannot modify another index register.
Possibility: I0ID
Impossibility: IXIY, IXIX (except FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH)
I0I0, IAIA (for FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH)

When a 32-bit constant is modified, the specified number and the following number are
used in combination to handle the data as a 32-bit data.
The result of the modification is a 32-bit data.
In the FP0/FP−e
Higher 16-bit area Lower 16-bit area

Contents of IY Contents of IX

When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32-bit data, specify
with IX.

In the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH (example of specify with I0)


Higher 16-bit area Lower 16-bit area

Contents of I1 Contents of I0

When modifying a 32-bit number, do not specify ID. Be aware that a syntax error will
not occur even if this is not specified.

4 - 20

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.5 Handling Index Registers

4.5.3 Example of Using an Index Register

Repeatedly reading in external data


With the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, any value between I0 and ID should
be specified in place of IX.

Example: Writing the contents of word external input relay WX3 to a


sequence of data registers beginning from DT0.
X0
F0 MV, K0, IX 1

X1
DF F0 MV, WX3, IXDT0 2

F35 +1, IX 3

1 When X0 turns on, K0 is written to index register IX.


2 When the X1 turns on, the contents of WX3 is transferred
to the data register specified by IXDT0.
3 Add 1 to IX.
In this case, the contents of IX will change successively,
and the destination data register will be as follows.

Input times of X1 Contents of IX Destination data register


1st 0→1 DT0
2nd 1→2 DT1
3rd 2→3 DT2
: : :

4 - 21

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Repeatedly changing the output destination (for FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH only)

Example: Changing the output destination successively each time X0


turns on
R9013
1 F0 MV, K0, I0
X0 I0Y10
2
X0
3 F35 +1, I0

1 K0 is initially written to index register I0.


2 When the X0 turns on, the first time Y10 will turn on.
3 Add 1 to the value of I0. From this point on, the output
destinations successively change as follows each time X0
turns on.
Input times of X0 Content of I0 Output destination
1st 0 Y10
2nd 1 Y11
3rd 2 Y12
: : :

4 - 22

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.5 Handling Index Registers

Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input


With the FP0R/FPΣ/FP−X/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, any value between I0 and ID should
be specified in place of IX.

Example 1: Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch

Programmable
controller

Timer 2 0 7 9 4 Timer time


number setting
setting
WX1 WX0
Digital
switches

R0
DF F81 BIN, WX1, IX 1

F81 BIN, WX0, IXSV0 2

1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and


set it in index register IX.
2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and
stored in the timer set value area SV specified by contents
of IX.

4 - 23

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Example 2: External output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified


by a digital switch
WY3

7-segment
Timer elapsed
indicator
value display

Programmable
controller

Timer
number 1 Digital
setting switches
WX1

R1
DF F81 BIN, WX1, IX 1

F80 BCD, IXEV0, WY3 2

1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary, and


set it in index register IX.
2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified
by IX to BCD, and output it to word external output relay
WY3.

4 - 24

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.6 Handling BCD Data

4.6 Handling BCD Data

4.6.1 BCD Data

BCD is an acronym for binary−coded decimal, and means that each digit of a decimal
number is expressed as a binary number.

Example: Expressing a decimal number in BCD


Decimal number

Each digit is converted to a binary


number.

BCD
0110 0100 0101
(Binary−coded
decimal)

4.6.2 Handling BCD Data in the Programmable Controller

When inputting data from a digital switch to the programmable controller or outputting
data to a 7−segment display (with decoder), the data must be in BCD form. In this case,
use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below.
BCD arithmetic instructions (F40 through F58), also exist which allow direct operation
on BCD data, however, it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions
(F20 through F38) as operation in the programmable controller takes place in binary.
Input from a digital switch
Use the BCD−to−BIN conversion instruction F81 (BIN).
1 9 9 2
Digital 1 9 9 2
switch Data inputted into the 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
programmable
controller (BCD data)

Programmable BCD (Conversion


↓ using F81 Data which can be
controller 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
BIN (BIN) processed in the
instruction) programmable Converted to 1992 in decimal
controller (BIN data) data.

4 - 25

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

Output to a 7−segment display (with decoder)


Use the BIN−to−BCD conversion instruction F80 (BCD).

BIN (Conversion Data processed in 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0


Programmable the programmable
↓ using F80
controller controller (BIN data)
BCD (BCD)
instruction)
Data outputted from 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
programmable
7-segment controller (BCD data) 1 9 9 2
display

4 - 26

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.7 Precautions for Programming

4.7 Precautions for Programming


Programs which do not execute correctly
Do not write the following programs as they will not execute correctly.
Program example 1:
Program in which the example 1 is rewritten
ANS
X0 X1 Y10 X0 X1 Y10
DF DF

X2 X0 X2

Program example 2:
Program in which the example 2 is rewritten
ANS
X0 X1 TMX5, K30 Y10 X0 X1 TMX 5, K 30 Y10

X2 X0 X2

Program example 3:
Program in which the example 3 is rewritten
PSHS
X0 X1 Y10 X0 X1 Y10

X2 Y11 X2 Y11
DF DF

X3 X3
ANS

When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a


differential instruction (DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS), push
stack (PSHS), read stack (RDS), or pop stack (POPS) instruction.

4 - 27

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.8 Rewrite Function During RUN

4.8.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN


How operation of rewrite during RUN
Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode. When a rewrite is attempted
during RUN, the tool service time is temporarily extended, program rewriting is
performed, and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode. For this
reason, the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several
hundreds of ms.
Operation during rewrite
External output (Y) is held.
External input (X) is ignored.
The timer (T) stops the clock.
Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions (DF), counter instructions
(CT), and left/right shift registers are ignored.
Interrupt functions are stopped.
Internal clock relays (special internal relays) are also stopped.
Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite.
Set values for timer/counter instructions
All set values specified with decimal constants (K) in timer and counter instructions are
preset in the corresponding set value areas (SV). Values in the elapsed value area (EV)
do not change.
Operation of rewrite during RUN completed flag
The rewrite during RUN completed flag (R9034) is a special internal relay that goes on
for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode. It can be
used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program.

4 - 28

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.8 Rewrite Function During RUN

4.8.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible


When the timeout error message is indicated:
Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in
PLC has been already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.

1. When ladder symbol mode


As a ladder editing is left, set it to the offline edit mode. Complete the program
conversion in the tool software, and then change to the online edit mode to check.
2. When boolean mode
A ladder editing is cleared.
Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again. After the
operation, change to the online edit mode to check.
When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series
programmable display.
Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN.
(The default setting is 5 seconds.)
Select “Transfer” from “File” in the menu bar.
The “transfer data” screen will open. Select
“Condition” to open “Communication Setting”
screen. Change the value for “Timeout”.Click
“OK” button to complete the change of setting.

For FP0/FP−e/FPΣ/FP−X/FP0R
Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
1. When the result of rewriting is a syntax error.
<Example>
When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions.
1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
2. Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
4. JP/LBL

4 - 29

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

5. LOOP/LBL
6. MC/MCE
Also, rewritng is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors.
2. During the forced input/output operation
Interrupt restrictions
When using interrupt, high−speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do
not perform a rewrite during RUN.
If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the operation as below will be performed. Exercise
caution.
1. Interrupt programs will be disabled. Enable by executing an ICTL
instruction once again.
<Example> Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)
R9013
ICTL, S1, S2

R9034

2. The high−speed counter will continue to count.


Target value match on/off instructions (F166/F167) will continue.
Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166/F167
instruction is running.
3. Pulse output and PWM output will be stopped.
State Instruction number Name
Continue F171 (SPDH) Pulse output (with channel specification) (Home position return)
Stop F172 (PLSH) Pulse output (with channel specification) (JOG operation)
Stop F173 (PWMH) PWM output (with channel specification)
Continue F174 (SP0H) Pulse output (with channel specification) (Selectable data table control operation)
Continue F175 (SPSH) Pulse output (Linear interpolation)
Stop F176 (SPCH) Pulse output (Circular interpolation)

4. The fixed time sampling trace will not be stopped.


For FP2/FP2SH
Instructions that cannot be added or deleted by rewriting during RUN
1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
2. Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
4. Control instructions (ED/LBL)
* The LBL instruction can be inserted/written, but cannot be deleted/erased.
Instructions that cannot be added or deleted during subprograms
1. JP/LBL
2. LOOP/LBL
3. MC/MCE
Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
1. When a syntax error occurred.
2. When the forced input/output operation is running.

4 - 30

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.8 Rewrite Function During RUN

4.8.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN


Item FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Rewrite procedure Maximum jof 128 steps.Changes are per- Rewriting performed by step.Caution is
formed by block.When PG conversion is required as rewriting takes place simulta-
executed online, the program will be re- neously with the change.
written.

Block a Block b

Operation OT/KP If an instruction written in block a is de- If an instruction written in block a is de-
of each leted in block b, the condition before the leted in block b, the condition before the
instruciton rewrite will be held.s rewrite will be held. Y contact relays
which are on bill be held in the on sattus.
To turn them off in the RUN mode, use
forced output.
TM/CT − If an instruction written in block a is de- − If an instruction written in block a is de-
leted in block b, the condition before the leted in block b, the condition before the
rewrite will be held. rewrite will be held.
− Set values specified by K constants in − Set values specified by K constants in
TM/CT instructions are preset in all of the TM/CT instructions are preset in all of the
corresponding SV’s in the program. corresponding SV’s in the program.
(Elapsed values EV do not change.) (Elapsed values EV do not change.)

Fun If an instruction written in block a is de- − If deleted, the output memory area will be
High−level leted in block b, the condition before the held.
instructions rewrite will be held.
MC/MCE When writing MC/MCE instructions, be Writing or deleting a single instruction dur-
sure to write the instructions as a pair. ing RUN is not possible. Write or delete the
instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol
mode.
CALL/SUB/ A subroutine is a program appearing be- Write in the order: RET, SUB, CALL
RET tween SUBn and RET instructions. Be Delete in the order: CALL, SUB, RET
sure to write it to an address which fol-
lows the ED instruction.
INT/IRET An interrupt program is an program ap- Write in the orde: IRET, INTDelete in the
pearing between INTn and IRET instruc- order: INT, IRET
tions. Be sure to write it to an address
which follows the ED instruction.
SSTP/STPE A distance with the same number cannot Writign and deletion of a single instruction
be defined twice. An SSTP instruction is not possible for a program with no step
cannot be written in a subprogram. ladder area.Write or delete both instruc-
tions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder
symbol mode.
In the case of an SSTP instruction only,
writing and deletion of a single instruction
is possible for a program with a step lad-
der area.
JP/LOOP/ Be sure to write the instruction for setting Write in the order: JP−LBL or LOOP−
LBL the loop number before LBL−LOOP in- LBLDelete in the order: LBL−JP or LBL−
structions. LOOP

4 - 31

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.9 Processing During Forced Input and Output

4.9.1 Processing when forced input/output is initiated during RUN

Forced reset/reset processing A


PLC
External input → X

Input/output update External output → Y

Forced reset/reset processing B

Operation

Forced reset/reset processing

Peripheral service

1. Processing of external input (X)


Regardless of the state of the input from the input device, forced on/off operation will
take precedence at a contact specified for forced input/output in the above procedure
B. At this time, the input LED will not blink, however, the area of input X in the operation
memory will be rewritten.
Contacts not specified will read in the on/off state according to the condition of the inptu
from the input device.
2. Processing of external output (Y)
Regardless of the result of operation, forced on/off will take precedence at a contact
specified for forced input/ouput in the above procedure A. At this time, the area of output
Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten. External output will take place
according to the input/output update timing in the above diagram.
The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.
3. Processing of Timer (T) and Counter (C)
Regardless of the timer/counter input condition, forced on/off operation will take
precedence at a contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the contact of the
timer (T) or counter (C) in the operation memory will be rewritten. Timing and counting
will not take place during control.
The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.

4 - 32

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.9 Processing During Forced Input and Output

Operation during operation


For small−sized PLCs FP0R, FP0, FPΣ and FP−X
Forced relay R and output Y are rewritten according to the results of operation.
For medium−sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH
For the relay and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction, the value of the forced
processing has a priority. When rewritten by a high−level instruction, the result of the
instruction has a priority.

4 - 33

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4.10 Second Program Area (FP2SH, FP10SH)


Explanation of operation method for FP2SH and FP10SH
For the type of FP2SH of which program capacity exceeds 60k steps and for the type
of FP10SH of which program capacity exceeds 60k steps if the memory is added, the
program area is divided into the first program area and the second program area. The
divided programs are separate program units, however, uploading and downloading
with TOOL is performed simultaneously. There are following restrictions for the
operation devices.

Device and function First program Second program


Bits X, Y, R, LWords WX, WY, WR, Common device
WL, DT, Ld, In, Fl
SALL Subroutine call The subroutine of the second pro- The subroutine of the first program
gram cannot be called up. cannot be called up.
SUB Subroutine entry 100 100
JP Jump 255 (However, jumping to the second 255 (However, jumping to the first
program is not possible.) program is not possible.)
LBL Label 255 255
INT Interrupt program Can be written in the first program Cannot be used.
only.
SSTP Step ladder Can be written in the first program Cannot be used.
only.
MC, MCE Master control 255 (A pair must be formed in the first 255 (A pair must be formed in the
program.) second program.)

Syntax check
− For SUB, JP, LBL, MC and MCE, the checks are performed as the above
table.
− The duplicated output of OT and KP instructions and the duplicated use of
timer and counter instructions are checked throughout the first and second
programs.

4 - 34

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


4.10 Second Program Area (FP2SH, FP10SH)

Operation flow diagram of FP2SH and FP10SH

I/O update As shown in the left diagram, the second program is


executed after the first program has completed.

At the points when the first program or the second


Index register bank = 0
File register bank = 0 program starts, the following settings will be auto-
matically selected.
Index register bank = 0
File register bank = 0
First program operation

Index register bank = 0


File register bank = 0

Second program operation

Tool service

Program switching method with FPWIN GR


Select “Edit” “Switch Programming Area” in the menu bar to change the program
area.

First program Second program

Note
The monitor data in the tool software is the data monitor when
both first and second programs complete.

4 - 35

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Precautions Concerning Programs

4 - 36

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Chapter 5
Appendix

Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com


Appendix ........................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers....... 5-3
5.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0 ............................................................5-5
5.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0 .................................................5-15
5.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0..................................................5-18
5.1.4 Table of System Registers for FP-e .........................................................5-28
5.1.5 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP-e ................................................5-32
5.1.6 Table of Special Data Registers for FP-e.................................................5-36
5.1.7 Table of System Registers for FP0R........................................................5-43
5.1.8 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0R...............................................5-49
5.1.9 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0R ...............................................5-59
5.1.10 Table of System Registers for FPΣ ........................................................5-78
5.1.11 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPΣ ...............................................5-84
5.1.12 Table of Special Data Registers for FPΣ ...............................................5-93
5.1.13 Table of System Registers for FP-X.....................................................5-107
5.1.14 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP-X............................................5-119
5.1.15 Table of Special Data Registers for FP-X ............................................5-130
5.1.16 Table of System Registers for FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH...........................5-151
5.1.17 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP1/FP-M/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH/FP3
.............................................................................................................5-165
5.1.18 Special Data Registers for FP2/FP2SH/FP3/FP10SH.........................5-176

5.2 Table of Basic Instructions .................................................................... 5-201

5.3 Table of High-level Instructions ............................................................. 5-209

5.4 Table of Error codes.............................................................................. 5-229

5.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands .................................. 5-242

5.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD...................................................................... 5-243

5.7 ASCII Codes.......................................................................................... 5-244

5-2
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special
Data Registers
Precation for System Registers

What is the system register area


• System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions
used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program.
• There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used.

Type of system registers


The registers to be used depend on each PLC.

(1) Allocation of user memory (System registers 0, 1 and 2)


These registers set the size of the program area and file register area, allowing the user memory area to
be configured for the environment used. The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type.
(2) Allocation of timers and counters (System register 5)
The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number.
(3) Hold/non-hold type setting (System registers 6 to 18)
When these registers are set to “hold type”, the values in the relays and data memory will be retained
even if the system is switched to PROG. mode or the power is turned off. If set to “non-hold type”, the
values will be cleared to “0”.
(4) Operation mode setting on error (System registers 4, 20 to 28)
Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error
and operation error occur.
(5) Time settings (System registers 30 to 34)
Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time.
(6) Remote I/O operation settings (System registers 35 and 36)
These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote
I/O is started, and the remote I/O update timing.
(7) MEWNET-W0/MEWNET-W/P PLC link settings (System registers 40 to 47, 50 to 55, and 57)
These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET-W0/MEWNET-W/P PC(PLC) link
communication.
Note) The default value setting is “no PC(PLC) link communication”.
(8) MEWNET-H PC(PLC) link settings (System register 49)
Set the data size to be processed during one scan in the MEWNET-H PC(PLC) link communication.
(9) Input settings (System registers 400 to 406)
When using the high-speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation
mode and the input number to be used for the function.
(10) Input time constant settings (FP1/FP-M System registers 404 to 407)
Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering
or noises.
(11) Number of temperature input averaging process settings (System register 409)
The number of averaging times can be set in order to even out the variation in the input thermocouple
values. For normal use it, set the number of times to t least twenty. For default value “0”, the number of
average processing times is 20.
(12) Tool and COM. ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 421)
Set these registers when the Tool port,and COM1 and COM2 ports are to be used for computer link,
general-purpose serial communication, PC(PLC) link, and modem communication.Note that
the default setting is computer link mode.

5-3
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Checking and changing the set value of system register
If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read),
there is no need write it again.

Using programming tool software


Produce:
1. Set the control unit in the PROG mode.
2.Option ->PLC Configuration
3.When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration
dialog box,the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed.
To change the value and setting status,write in the new value and /or select the setting status.
4.To register these settings,choose OK

Precautions for system register setting


-System register settings are effective from the time they are set.
However, input settings,tool port,COM port,and modem connection settings become effective when the
mode is changed from PROG. to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power
is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a
command to the modem which enables it for reception.
-When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized

5-4
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0
Content of system register settings
1. Setting the timers and counters (System register 5)
By indicating the counter start number, the timer and counter are split into two areas. The timer and
counter together total 144 points, and the default value for th split is 100. Thus the point allotment is as
shown in the table below.

Timer 100 points (No. 0 to No. 99)


Counter 44 points (No. 100 to No. 143)

Setting example
To increase the number of timers to 120, change the value of system register 5 to K120.

For T32, set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value. This sets the timer to a non-hold type and
counter to a hold type.

By setting system register 5 to “0”, the whole area becomes the counter. Also, by setting it to the value
“144”, the whole area becomes the timer.

5-5
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
2. Hold types and non-hold type settings (System registers 6 to 8 and 14)
With the C10/C14/C16/C32/SL1, the areas held in the event of a power supply interruption are fixed at
the areas shown in the table below, and the settings for system registers 6 to 8 and 14, will be invalid.

C10/C14/C16
Timer Non-hold type: All points
Non-hold type: From the set value to C139
Counter
Hold type: 4 points (elapsed values )C140 to C143
976 points (R0 to R60F)
Non-hold type:
61 words (WR0 to WR60)
Internal relay
32 points (R610 to R62F)
Hold type:
2 words (WR61 to WR62)
Non-hold type: 1652 words (DT0 to DT1651)
Data register
Hold type: 8 words (DT1652 to DT1659)

C32/SL1
Timer Non-hold type: All points
Non-hold type: From the set value to C127
Counter
Hold type: 16 points (elapsed values )C128 to C143
880 points (R0 to R54F)
Non-hold type:
55 words (WR0 to WR54
Internal relay
128 points (R550 to R62F)
Hold type:
8 words (WR55 to WR62)
Non-hold type: 6112 words (DT0 to DT6111)
Data register
Hold type: 32 words (DT6112 to DT6143)

With the T32, set each relay and register to a hold type or non-hold type.

For normal situations, set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value. This sets the timer to a non-
hold type and counter to a hold type.
By setting this value to “0”, the whole area becomes hold type. Also, by setting it to the valeu 1 higher
than the last number, the whold area becomes non-hold type.

C32/SL1
Type
T32
Area
Timer All non-hold type
Counter All hold type
Internal Non-hold type Non-hold type: 10 words (WR0 to WR9)
relay Hold type Hold type: 53 words (WR10 to WR62)
Data register All hold type

5-6
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Table of system registers
C10, C14, C16, C32, T32 and SL1 in the table respectively indicate 10-point, 14-point, 16-point, 32-point
type and S-LINK type FP0 control units.
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
The set values are fixed and cannot
be changed.
Alloca-
The stored values vary depending on
tion of Sequence program area
0 - the type.
user capacity
K3: 3K words (C10, C14, C16)
memory
K5: 5K words (C32, SL1)
K10: 10K words (T32)
Timer and counter
100 0 to 144
5 division (setting of
(K100) (K0 to K144)
starting counter number) Set the system
Hold type area starting registers 5 and 6 to
number setting for timer 100 0 to 144 the same value.
6
and counter (K100) (K0 to K144)
(Available type: T32)
Hold type area starting
Hold/
number setting for internal 10
Non- 7 0 to 63 (K0 to K63)
relays (in word units) (K10)
hold
(Available type: T32)
Hold type area starting
number setting for data 0
8 0 to 16384 (K0 to K16384)
registers (K0)
(Available type: T32)
Hold or non-hold setting
Non-hold Hold (K10)
14 for step ladder process
(K1) Non-hold (K1)
(Available type: T32)
Disable or enable setting Disable Disable (will be syntax error) (K0)
20
for duplicated output (K0) Enable (will not be syntax error) (K1)
Operation setting when an
Stop Stop (K0)
23 I/O verification error
(K0) Operate (K1)
occurs
Action
Operation setting when an Stop Stop (K0)
on error 26
operation error occurs (K0) Operate (K1)
Operation settings when
communication error Operate Stop (K0)
27
occurs in the remote I/O (K1) Operate (K1)
(S-LINK) system
Note) The setting values of the system registers No. 6, 7, 8 and 14 becomes invalid with the types other
than T32.

5-7
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
10 ms to 81900 ms (K4 to K32760)
Used of default setting (K2600/6500
ms) is recommended.

Wait time setting for


6500 ms
31 multi-frame
(K2600)
communication

Time
setting 2.5 ms to 160 ms (K1 to K64 ): Scans
once each specified time interval.
0 (K0):Normal scan

Constant value settings 0 ms


34
for scan time (K0)

Do not set X0 as high-speed


counter.
2-phase input (X0, X1)
2-phase input (X0, X1),
Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
Do not set Incremental input (X0), Reset input
X0 as (X2)
high- CH0 Decremental input (X0)
speed Decremental input (X0),
High-speed Reset input (X2)
Setting by counter.
counter Individual input (X0, X1)
Input progra-
400 mode Individual input (X0, X1),
setting mming tool Reset input (X2)
settings
software Direction decision (X0, X1)
(X0 to X2)
Direction decision (X0, X1),
Reset input (X2)
Do not set X1 as high-speed
Do not set counter.
X1 as Incremental input (X1)
Incremental input (X1), Reset input
high- CH1
(X2)
speed Decremental input (X1)
counter. Decremental input (X1), Reset input
(X2)
Note1) If the operation mode is set to 2-phase, individual, or direction differentiation, the setting for CH1
is invalid.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH1 takes precedence.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].
5-8
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value

High-
Setting
speed
by FP
Input counter CH0/
400 pro- H0
setting mode CH1
grammer
settings
II
(X0 to X2)

Note1) If the operation mode is set to 2-phase, individual, or direction differentiation, the setting for CH1
is invalid.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH1 takes precedence.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].

5-9
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
Do not set X3 as high-speed counter.
2-phase input (X3, X4)
2-phase input (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
Incremental input (X3)
Do not Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
set X3 Decremental input (X3)
as high- CH2 Decremental input (X3),
speed Reset input (X5)
Individual input (X3, X4)
counter.
Individual input (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
Direction decision (X3, X4)
Direction decision (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
Do not Do not set X4 as high-speed counter.
set X4 Incremental input (X4)
as high- CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
speed Decremental input (X4)
counter. Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)

Setting
High-
by
speed
progra-
Input counter
401 mming
setting mode
tool
settings
soft-
(X3 to X5)
ware

CH2/
H0
CH3

Note1) If the operation mode is set to 2-phase, individual, or direction differentiation, the setting for CH3
is invalid.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH3 takes precedence.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].

5-10
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value

The checked contacts are set as


pulse catch input.

In FP Programmer II, enter the above


settings in hexadecimal.
Pulse catch input Not set Example:
402 When X3 and X4 are set as pulse
function settings (H0)
catch input

Settings X6 and X7 are invalid.


Using FPWIN GR

Input
The checked contacts are set as
setting
interrupt input.

Specify the effective interrupt edge.


(When set: ON→OFF is valid)
Using FP Programmer II
Not set Example:
403 Interrupt input settings When setting inputs X0, X1, X2 and
(H0)
X3 as interrupts, and X0 and X1 are
set as interrupt inputs when going
from on to off.

Note1) With the TOOL software, “0” or “1” is set for each bit on the screen in the setting for system
register 403.
Note2) If system register 400 to 403 are set simultaneously for the same inptu relay, the following
precedence order is effective:
[High-speed counter] ‘[Pulse catch]’ [Interrupt input].
When the high-speed counter is being used in the incremental input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input and as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and input X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.
No. 400: H1 a This setting will be valid. No. 402: H1 No. 403: H1

5-11
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
Unit No. setting for tool
1
410 port (when connecting C- 1 to 32 (K1 to K32)
(K1)
NET)
Using FPWIN GR
Modem: Disable/Enable
Data length: 7 bits/8 bits

Using FP programmer II
Specify the setting contents using H
constants.
Modem:
Disabled
Tool Communication format Data
411
port setting for tool port length:
setting 8 bits
(H0)

When connecting a modem, set the


unit number to 1 with system register
410.
Setting by
Baud rate program 9600 0: 9600 bps
414
setting ming tool (H0) 1: 19200 bps
software

Tool
Baud rate Setting by
port/
setting for FP pro-
RS232C 414 H1
tool port and grammer
port
RS232C port II
setting

If 19200 bps is set for both the tool


port and RS232C port, H100 should
be written.

5-12
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
Using FPWIN GR
Not used
Computer link
General-purpose communication
Not used Using FP programmer II
412 Selection of operation
(K0) K0: RS232C port is not used.
K1: Computer link mode (when
connecting C-NET)
K2: Serial data communication mode
(general port)
Using FPWIN GR
- Data length: 7 bits/8bits
- Parity check: None/Odd/Even
- Stop bit: 1/2
* The following setting is valid only
when the communication mode
specified by system register 412 has
been set to “General-purpose serial
communication”.
Start code:
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
None - Start code: STX not exist/STX exist
Terminal
code: CR Using FP programmer II
Stop bit: Specify the setting contents using H
413 Communication format 1 bit constants.
RS232C Paritycheck:
port With odd
setting
Data length:
8 bits
(H3)

19200 bps
9600 bps
Baud Setting by 4800 bps
9600
414 rate programming 2400 bps
setting tool software (H1) 1200 bps
600 bps
300 bps
Unit no. (when 1
415 1 to 32 (K1 to K32)
connecting C-NET) (K1)
Using FPWIN GR
Diable/Enable
Disable
416 Modem connection Using FP programmer II
(H0)
H0: Modem disabled
H8000: Modem enabled

5-13
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Add- Default
Item Name Descriptions
ress value
C10C/C14C/C16C: 0 to 1659 (K0 to
Starting address setting 0 K1659)
417
for received buffer (K0) C32C/SL1: 0 to 6143 (K0 to K6143)
T32C: 0 to 16383 (K0 to K16383)
C10C/C14 1660
0 to 1660 (K0 to K1660)
Capacity C/C16C (K1660)
setting for 6144
418 C32C/SL1 0 to 6144 (K0 to K6144)
reception (K6144)
buffer 16384
T32C 0 to 16384 (K0 to K16384)
(K16384)

5-14
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.

FP0
Address Name Description
Self-diagnostic error Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
flag The self-diagnostic error code is stored in DT9000.
R9001 to
Not used -
R9003
Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
I/O verification error
R9004 The position number of the I/O where the verification error
flag
was occurred is stored in DT9010.
R9005,
Not used -
R9006
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error
Operation error flag occurs.
R9007
(hold) The address where the error occurred is stored in DT9017.
(Indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error flag
R9008 The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
(non-hold)
DT9018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
Turns on for an instant,
R9009 Carry flag - when an overflow or underflow occurs.
– when “1” is set by one of the shift instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900A > Flag larger in the “F60 (CMP) to F63 (DWIN) comparison
instructions.”
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions (F60 to F63).
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900C < Flag smaller in the “F60 (CMP) to F63 (DWIN) comparison
instructions.
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in
the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM)
Auxiliary timer
R900D auxiliary timer instruction.
contact
It turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction
turns off.
This turns on when an error occurs during communication
R900E Tool port error flag
with a programming tool.
Constant scan error Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in
R900F
flag system register 34 during constant scan execution.
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.

5-15
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Address Name Description
Turns on only at the first scan in the operation.
R9013 Initial on pulse relay
Turns off from the second scan and maintains the off state.
Turns off only at the first scan in the operation.
R9014 Initial off pulse relay
Turns on from the second scan andmaintains the on state.
Step ladder initial on Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process
R9015
pulse relay the moment step ladder process is opened.
R9016,
Not used -
R9017
0.01 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.01 s
R9018
relay cycles.

0.02 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s


R9019
relay cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.1 s


R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.2 s


R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 1 s


R901C 1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 2 s


R901D 2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

1 min clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1 min


R901E
relay cycles.
R901F Not used -
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 to
Not used -
R9025
R9026
Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
(*Note)
R9027
Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to REMOTE.
(*Note)
R9028 Not used -
Note) Used by the system.

5-16
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0
Address Name Description
R9029 Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay
Forcing flag
(*Note) timer/counter contacts.
R902A External interrupt Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by
(*Note) enable flag the ICTL instruction.
R902B
Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
(*Note)
R902C to
Not used -
R902F
R9030,
Not used -
R9031
RS232C port mode
R9032 When “General-use port” is selected, “K2” goes on.
flag
Printout instruction Turns on while a F147 (PR) instruction is executed.
R9033
flag Turns off when a F147 (PR) instruction is not executed.
This is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first
Rewrite during RUN
R9034 scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode.
flag
(CPU Ver. 2.1 or later available)
S-LINK I/O communi- Turns on when the S-LINK error (ERR 1, 3 or 4) occurs
R9035
cation error flag using S-LINK system.
S-LINK communica- Turns on when communication is taking place with an S-
R9036
tion status flag LINK input/Ooutput unit.
RS232C communica-
R9037 Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs.
tion error flag
RS232C reception Turns on when a terminator is received during the serial
R9038
completed flag data communicating.
Turns on while data is not send during the serial data
RS232C transmission communicating.
R9039
completed flag Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data
communicating.
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903A counter control ch0
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903B counter control ch1
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903C counter control ch2
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
High-speed
Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903D counter control ch3
F166(HC1S) to F170(PWM) are executed.
flag
R903E,
Not used -
R903F
Note) Used by the system.

5-17
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0
The special data registers are one word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific information. With the
exception of registers for which “Writing is possible” is indicated in the “Description” column, these
registers cannot be written to.

Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
Self-diagnostic error
DT90000 DT9000 when a self-diagnostic error occurs. Monitor the
code
error code using decimal display.
The position of the I/O for which an error
DT90010 DT9010 I/O verify error unit
occurred is stored in bits 0 to 3.
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Auxiliary register for
DT90014 DT9014 positions 0 to 3 when F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL)
operation
instruction is executed.
The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in
DT90015 DT9015 DT9015/DT90015 when F32(%) or F52(B%)
instruction is executed.
Auxiliary register for
The divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
operation
DT9015 and DT9016/DT90015 and DT90016
DT90016 DT9016 when F33(D%) or F53(DB%) instruction is
executed.
After commencing operation, the address where
Operation error
DT90017 DT9017 the first operation error occurred is stored.
address (hold)
Monitor the address using decimal display.
The address where an operation error occurred
is stored. Each time an error occurs, the new
Operation error
DT90018 DT9018 address overwrites the previous address. At the
address (non-hold )
beginning of scan, the address is 0. Monitor the
address using decimal display.
The data stored here is increased by one every
2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
DT90019 DT9019 2.5 ms ring counter Difference between the values of the two points
(absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed time
between the two points.

5-18
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1

DT9020
(Availabl S-LINK status
-
e type: flag/error flag
SL1)
Notes
- ERR1 and ERR3 occur even if the power
supply on the S-LINK side is interrupted, but are
canceled when the power supply is turned on
again.
- ERR4 is held. To cancel it, repair the
disconnected wire in the S-LINK syste, or
whatever iscausing the problem, and then either
turn the power to the FP0 on again, press the
SET switch to reset it, or turn the power supply
on again on the S-LINK unit side.

5-19
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
(When normal)

Note
- When the SET switch is pressed, the number
of input/output units connected to the S-LINK
system is set.
DT9021 (If the same address has been specified for
No. of units connected multiple units, the units are counted as a single
(Availabl
- to S-LINK/error
e type: unit. This is invalid, however, if an ERR4 error is
address
SL1) in progress.)

(If ERR4 occurs)

The current scan time is stored here. Scan time


Scan time (current
is calculated using the formula:
DT90022 DT9022 value)
Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1
(*Note)
K50 indicates 5 ms.
Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. The maximum and
minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG. mode.

5-20
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
Scan time (minimum time is calculated using the formula:
DT90023 DT9023
value) (*Note1) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
Scan time (maximum scan time is calculated using the formula:
DT90024 DT9024
value) (*Note 1) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using ICTL
instruction can be monitored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
DT90025 DT9025 monitoring register for
(*Note2) (*Note2) interrupts
(INT 0 to 5)

DT90026 DT9026 Not used -


The value set by the ICTL instruction is stored.
DT90027 DT9027 Periodical interrupt
K0: periodical interrupt is not used.
(*Note2) (*Note2) interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 10ms to 30s
DT90028 DT9028 Not used -
DT90029 DT9029 Not used -
DT90030 DT9030
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90031 DT9031
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90032 DT9032
The contents of the specified message are
(*Note2) (*Note2) Character storage by
stored in these special data registers when F149
DT90033 DT9033 F149 MSG instruction
(MSG) instruction is executed.
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90034 DT9034
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90035 DT9035
(*Note2) (*Note2)
DT90036 DT9036 Not used -
The number of data that match the searched
Work 1 for F96 (SRC)
DT90037 DT9037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) instruction
instruction
is executed.
Note1) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time. The
maximum and minimum values are cleared when each mode is switched between RUN mode and
PROG. mode.
Note2) Used by the system.

5-21
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The position of the first matching data, counting
Work 2 for F96 (SRC)
DT90038 DT9038 from the starting 16-bit area, is stored here when
instruction
an F96 (SRC) instruction is executed.
DT90039 DT9039
to to Not used -
DT90043 DT9043
The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
DT90044 DT9044
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value for ch0
to the special registers DT9044 and
(*Note1)
DT9045/DT90044 and DT90045.
DT90045 DT9045
The value can be written by executing F1 (DMV)
instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90046 DT9046
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value for ch0
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
(*Note1)
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90047 DT9047
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.
The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
DT90048 DT9048
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value area for
to the special registers DT9048 and
ch1 (*Note1)
DT9049/DT90048 and DT90049.
DT90049 DT9049
The value can be written by executing F1 (DMV)
instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90050 DT9050
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value area for
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
ch1 (*Note1)
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90051 DT9051
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.
Note1) In the FP0 compatibility mode of FP0R, it is 32-bit data.

5-22
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, stop high-speed counter instruction
(F168), and clear the high-speed counter.

Control code setting

Software is not reset: H0 (0000)


Perform software reset: H1 (0001)
High-speed counter Disable count: H2 (0010)
DT90052 DT9052 Disable hardware reset: H4 (0100)
control flag
Stop pulse output (clear instruction): H8 (1000)
Perform software reset and stop pulse output:
H9 (1001)

The 16 bits of DT9052/DT90052 are allocated in


groups of four to high-speed channels 0 to 3 as
shown below.

A hardware reset disable is only effective when


using the reset input (X2 and X5). In all other
cases it is ignored.
When using pulse output, a hardware reset input
is equivalent to an home point proximate input.
Hour and minute data of the Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar) are stored here.
This data is read-only data; it cannot be
Real-Time Clock overwritten.
DT90053 - (Clock/Calendar)
monitor (hour/minute)

5-23
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and
Real-Time Clock
day-of-the-week data for the Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar)
DT90054 - (Clock/Calendar) is stored. The built-in Real-
monitor and setting
Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) will operate
(minute/second)
correctly through the year 2099 and supports
leap years. The Real-Time Clock
Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) can be set (the time set) by
(Clock/Calendar) writing a value using a programming tool
DT90055 -
monitor and setting
software or a program that uses the F0 (MV)
(day/hour)
instruction.

Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar)
DT90056 -
monitor and setting
(year/month)

Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar)
DT90057 -
monitor and setting
(day-of-the-week)
As a day of the week is not automatially set on
FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.

5-24
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) is
adjusted as follows.
When setting the Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar) by program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the time
is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot be
performed with any instruction other than F0
(MV) instruction.)

Example:
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the
X0 turns on.

Real-Time Clock If you changed the values of DT90054 to


(Clock/Calendar) time DT90057 with the data monitor functions of
DT90058 -
setting and 30 seconds programming tool software, the time will be set
correction when the new values are written. Therefore, it is
unnecessary to write to DT90058.

When the correcting times less than 30


seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become
exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is
completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0.
Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns on

At the time of correction, if between 0 and 29


seconds, it will be moved down, and if the
between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved up.
In the example above, if the time was 5 minutes
29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes 0 second;
and, if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds, it will
become 6 minutes 0 second.
Note) After discharging the battery (including when the power is turned on for the first time), the values of
DT90053 to DT90058 change at random. Once the time and date have been set, these values will
function normally.

5-25
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1

Serial communication
DT90059 DT9059 - Tool port
error code
bit 0=1: Over run error
bit 1=1: Framing error
bit 2=1: Parity error
- RS232C port
bit 8=1: Over run error
bit 9=1: Framing error
bit 10=1: Parity error
Process
DT90060 DT9060 number:
0 to 15
Process
DT90061 DT9061 number: Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder
16 to 31 process. When the process starts up, the bit
Process corresponding to the process number turns
DT90062 DT9062 number: on”1”.
32 to 47
Process Monitor using binary display.
DT90063 DT9063 number:
Step
48 to 63
ladder
Process
process
DT90064 DT9064 number:
64 to 79
Process
DT90065 DT9065 number:
80 to 95
Process A programming tool software can be used to
DT90066 DT9066 number: write data.
96 to 111
Process
DT90067 DT9067 number:
112 to 127

5-26
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Address
FP0 C10,
Name Descriptions
FP0 T32 C14, C16,
C32, SL1
The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
DT90104 DT9104 speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value area for
to the special registers DT9104 and
ch2 (*Note1)
DT9015/DT90104 and DT90105.
DT90105 DT9105 The value can be written by executing a DMV
(F1) instruciton.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90106 DT9106
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value area for
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
ch2 (*Note1)
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90107 DT9107
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.
The elapsed value (24-bit data) of the high-
speed counter is stored here. Each time the ED
DT90108 DT9108
instruction is executed, the elapsed value for the
High-speed counter
high-speed counter is automatically transferred
elapsed value area for
to the special registers DT9108 and
ch3 (*Note1)
DT9109/DT90108 and DT90109.
DT90109 DT9109
The value can be written by executing a DMV
(F1) instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT90110 DT9110
instruction is stored here.
High-speed counter
Target values have been preset for the various
target value area for
instructions, to be used when the high-speed
ch3 (*Note1)
counter related instruction F166 to F170 is
DT90111 DT9111
executed. These preset values can only be read,
and cannot be written.
Note1) In the FP0 compatibility mode of FP0R, it is 32-bit data.

5-27
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.4 Table of System Registers for FP-e
FP-e
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Starting number setting for
5 100 0 to 144
counter
Hold type area starting
6 number setting for timer and 140 0 to 144
counter
Hold/ Hold type area starting
Non- 7 number setting for internal 61 0 to 63
hold relays (See note.)
Hold type area starting
8 number setting for data 1652 0 to 1660
registers
Hold or non-hold setting for
14 Non-hold Hold/Non-hold
step ladder process
Yes
Disable or enable setting for Fixed
20 FPWIN GR:
duplicated output FPWIN GR: Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Action Dis- When a battery error occurs,
on abled: a self-diagnostic error is not
error issued and the ERROR LED
Alarm battery error
does not light.
4 (Operating setting when Disabled
battery error occurs) Ena- When a battery error occurs,
bled: a self-diagnostic error is
issued and the ERROR LED
lights.
Wait time setting for multi-
31 6500.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
Time frame communication
set- 0: Normal scan
Constant value settings for
ting 34 0.0 ms 0 to 160 ms: Scans once each
scan time
specified time interval
Note) Use models without a Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) function with the default value left as is.
If you change the setting the hold/non-hold operation will be unstalbe.
Settings are valid for models with a Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) time function.

5-28
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X0, X1)
Two-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
Do not set Decremental input (X0)
input X0 Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
CH0
as high- incremental/decremental input (X0, X1)
speed incremental/decremental input (X0, X1),
High-speed counter Reset input (X2)
counter Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
400 operation mode
settings (X0 to X2) X1)
Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
X1), Reset input (X2)
CH1:
Do not set Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X1)
input X1
CH1 Incremental inptu (X1), Reset input (X2)
as high- Decremental input (X1)
High- speed Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2)
speed counter
coun- Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
ter Two-phase input (X3, X4)
Two-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
Incremental input (X3)
CH2: Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
Do not set Decremental input (X3)
input X3 Decremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
CH2 Incremental/decremental input (X3, X4)
as high-
speed Incremental/decremental input (X3, X4),
High-speed counter Reset input (X5)
counter Incremental/decremental control input
401 operation mode
settings (X3 to X5) (X3, X4)
Incremental/decremental control input
(X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
HC3:
Do not set Do not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X4)
input X4
CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
as high- Decremental input (X4)
speed Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
counter

5-29
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value

Pulse catch input


402 Not set
settings Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch
input.

Inter-
rupt-
Specify the input contacts used as intrrupt
input
Interrupt input input.
403 Not set
settings

Specify the effective interrupt edge.


(When set: ON→OFF is valid)
Note1) If the operation mode is set to two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH1 is invalid in part 2 of system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is
invalid in part 2 of system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and
403.
Note4) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective:
1. High-speed counter
2. Pulse catch
3. Interrupt input.
This means, the counter keeps counting even after an interrupt.

5-30
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Number of
temperature input
Tem- 0 to 50
average processing
pera-
409 times 0 For default valeu “0”, the number of
ture
(Available PLC: average processing times is 20.
inout
model with
thermocouple input)
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Disabled Modem connection: enabled/Disabled
Data length: 7 bits/8 bits
When connecting a modem, the format will
Tool Communication
411 Data length: be as follows depending on the data length
port format setting
8 bits setting.
set-
8 bits data length: no parity, 1 stop bit
ting
7 bits data length: odd parity, 1 stop bit
Communication
9600 bps
414 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps
19200 bps
setting
Computer link
Communication
412 Computer link General-purpose serial communication
mode setting
MODBUS RTU (Ver.1.2 and higher)
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
Odd
system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
“General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
Communication
COM. 300 bps / 600 bps / 1200 bps / 2400 bps /
414 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps
port 4800 bps / 9600 bps / 19200 bps
setting
set-
1 to 99
ting
(In Ver.1.2 and higher, settings can be
415 Unit no. setting 1
changed in R mode even with the front
operation switch.)
Selection of modem
416 Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Starting address for
received buffer of
417 0 0 to 1659
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
418 received of general 1660 0 to 1660
(serial data)
communication mode

5-31
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.5 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP-e
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.
FP-e
Relay No. Name Description
Self-diagnostic error Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
flag ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.
R9001 Not used -
R9002 Not used -
R9003 Not used -
R9004 Not used -
Backup battery error
R9005 flag Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs.
(non-hold)
Turns on and keeps the on state when a backup
Backup battery error battery error occurs. Once a battery error has been
R9006 flag detected, this is held even after recovery has been
(hold) made. It goes off if the power supply is turned off, or if
the system is initialized.
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error
Operation error flag occurs.
R9007
(hold) ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in DT9017.
(Indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error flag ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored
R9008
(non-hold) in DT9018. The contents change each time a new error
occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the
R9009 Carry flag calculation results, and as a result of a shift system
instruction being executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900A > Flag
larger in the comparison instructions.
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions.
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900C < Flag
smaller in the comparison instructions.
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in
the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM)
Auxiliary timer
R900D auxiliary timer instruction.
instruction flag
The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer
instruction turns off.
Tool port Turns on when a communication error at Tool port has
R900E
communication error occurred.
Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in
Constant scan error
R900F system register 34 during constant scan execution.
flag
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.

5-32
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e
Relay No. Name Description
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (on type) pulse
R9013 been started, and goes off for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (off type) pulse
R9014 been started, and goes on for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Step ladder initial Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at
R9015
pulse relay (on type) the step ladder control.
R9016 Not used -
R9017 Not used -
0.01 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.01 s
R9018
relay cycles.

0.02 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s


R9019
relay cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.1 s


R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.2 s


R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 1 s


R901C 1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 2 s


R901D 2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

1 min clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1 min


R901E
relay cycles.
R901F Not used -

5-33
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e
Relay No. Name Description
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used -
R9022 Not used -
R9023 Not used -
R9024 Not used -
R9025 Not used -
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used -
R9028 Not used -
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output
R9029 Forcing flag
relay timer/counter contacts.
Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by
R902A Interrupt enable flag
the ICTL instruction.
R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
R902C Not used -
R902D Not used -
R902E Not used -
R902F Not used -

5-34
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e
Relay No. Name Description
R9030 Not used -
R9031 Not used -
R9032 Not used -
Print instruction Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033
execution flag On: Execution is in progress.
RUN overwrite Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a
R9034
complete flag rewrite during RUN operation.
R9035 Not used -
R9036 Not used -
COM port
- Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data
R9037 communication error
communication.
flag
COM port reception
done flag during - Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038
general-purpose serial purpose serial communication.
communication
COM port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in
transmission done
general-purpose serial communication.
R9039 flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
purpose serial
purpose serial communication.
communication
High-speed Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903A counter control ch0 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F168(SPD1) to F170(PWM) are executed.
High-speed Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903B counter control ch1 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F168(SPD1) to F170(PWM) are executed.
High-speed Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903C counter control ch2 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F168(SPD1) to F170(PWM) are executed.
High-speed Turns on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903D counter control ch3 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F168(SPD1) to F170(PWM) are executed.
R903E -
R903F -

5-35
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.6 Table of Special Data Registers for FP-e
The special data registers are one word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific information.

FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)


Register Read Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. -ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT9000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
Switches the FP-escreen to the screen of the
mode specified.
K0: N mode first screen
K1: N mode second screen
FP-e screen display K2: S mode first screen
DT9001 A N/A
switching K3: S mode second screen
K4: R mode first screen
K5: R mode second screen
K6: I mode first screen
K7: I mode second screen
DT9002
Analog input data Ch.0 analog input data (2-word real data) A N/A
DT9003
DT9004
Analog input data Ch.1 analog input data (2-word real data) A N/A
DT9005
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction,
DT9014 register for data F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The
shift instruction value can be read and written by executing the
F0 (MV) instruction.
The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in
DT9015 when the division instruction F32(%) A A
DT9015 or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The
Operation auxiliary
divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in DT9015
register for division
and DT9016 when the division instruction
instruction
F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is executed. The value
DT9016 can be read and written by executing the
F0(MV) instruction.
After commencing operation, the address
Operation error where the first operation error occurred is
DT9017
address (hold type) stored. Monitor the address using decimal
display.
The address where an operation error
occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs,
Operation error
the new address overwrites the previous
DT9018 address (non-hold
address. At the beginning of a scan, the A N/A
type)
address is 0. Monitor the address using
decimal display.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
2.5 ms ring counter
DT9019 Note1) Difference between the values of the two
points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed
time between the two points.

5-36
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)

Register Read Writ


Name Descriptions
No. -ing -ing

DT9020 Not used -


N/A N/A
DT9021 Not used -
The current scan time is stored here. Scan time
Scan time (current is calculated using the formula:
DT9022 Note)
value) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
Scan time
time is calculated using the formula:
DT9023 (minimum value)
Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
Scan time
scan time is calculated using the formula: A N/A
DT9024 (maximum value)
Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
DT9025 monitoring register
for interrupts

DT9026 Not used - N/A N/A


The value set by the ICTL instruction is stored.
Periodical interrupt
DT9027 K0: periodical interrupt is not used. A N/A
interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s
DT9028 Not used -
N/A N/A
DT9029 Not used -
DT9030 Message 0
DT9031 Message 1
The contents of the specified message (Data
DT9032 Message 2
lenght) are stored in these special data registers A N/A
DT9033 Message 3
when F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
DT9034 Message 4
DT9035 Message 5
Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time. (in PROG
mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are
cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.

5-37
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ
Name Descriptions
No. -ing -ing
DT9036 Not used - N/A N/A
Operation auxiliary
The number of data that match the searched
register for search
DT9037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) insturction
instruction
is executed.
F96(SRC)
A A
Operation auxiliary
The position of the first matching data is stored
register for search
DT9038 here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is
instruction
executed.
F96(SRC)
DT9039 Not used - N/A N/A
Temperature input
DT9040
ch.0 The value of the temperature input before
A N/A
Temperature input average processing is stored.
DT9041
ch.1
DT9042 Not used - N/A N/A
DT9043 Used by the system Used by the system (Battery). A N/A
High-speed The elapsed value (24-bit data) of the high-
DT9044
counter For speed counter is stored here. The value can be
A A
elapsed CH0 read and written by executing F1 (DMV)
DT9045
value instruction.
The targe value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
DT9046 counter specified by the high-speed counter
High-speed instruction is stored here. Target values have
For
counter been preset for the various instructions to be A N/A
CH0
target value used when the high-speed counter related
DT9047 instruction is executed. The value can be read
by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.
High-speed
DT9048 The elapsed value (24-bit data) of the high-
counter
For speed counter is stored here. The value can be
elapsed A A
CH1 read and written by executing F1 (DMV)
DT9049 value
instruction.
area

5-38
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ
Name Descriptions
No. -ing -ing
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
DT9050 counter specified by the high-speed counter
High-speed
instruction is stored here. Target values have
counter For
been preset for the various instructions to be A N/A
target value CH1
used when the high-speed counter related
DT9051 area
instruction is executed. The value can be read
by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.

Control code setting

High-speed counter
DT9052 and pulse output N/A A
control flag

Hour and minute data of the Real-Time Clock


(Clock/Calendar) are stored here. This data is
Real-Time Clock
read-only data. It cannot be overwritten.
(Clock/Calendar)
DT9053 A N/A
monitor
(hour/minute)

5-39
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ
Name Descriptions
No. -ing -ing
Real-Time Clock The year, month, day, hour, minute, second and
(Clock/Calendar) day-of-the-week data for the Real-Time Clock
DT9054
setting (Clock/Calendar) is stored. The built-in Real-
(minute/second) Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) will operate
Real-Time Clock correctly through the year 2099 and supports
DT9055 (Clock/Calendar) leap years. The Real-Time Clock
setting (day/hour) (Clock/Calendar) can be set by writing a value
Real-Time Clock using a programming tool software or a program
(Clock/Calendar) that uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see example
DT9056
setting for DT90058) A A
(year/month)

Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar)
DT9057
setting (day-of-the-
week)

By setting the highest bit of DT9058 to 1, the


time becomes that written to DT9054 to DT9057
by the F0 (MV) instruction. After the time is set,
DT9058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot be performed
with any instruction other than the F0 (MV)
instruction.)

<Example>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
X0 turns on.
Real-Time Clock
DT9058 (Clock/Calendar) FPWIN GR: A A
time setting

If you changed the values of DT9054 to DT9057


with the programming tool software, the time will
be set when the new values are written.
Therefore, it is unnecessary to write to DT9058.

5-40
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ
Name Descriptions
No. -ing -ing
Error code is sotred here when a
communication error occurs.

Serial
DT9059 communication A N/A
error code

Step ladder process


DT9060
(0 to 15)
Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder
Step ladder process
DT9061 process. When the process starts up, the bit
(16 to 31)
corresponding to the process number turns on.
Step ladder process
DT9062
(32 to 47)
Monitor using binary display.
Step ladder process
DT9063
(48 to 63)
A A
Step ladder process
DT9064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT9065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT9066 A programming tool software can be used to
(96 to 111)
write data.
Step ladder process
DT9067
(112 to 127)

5-41
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-e (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ
Name Descriptions
No. -ing -ing
High-speed The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
DT9104
counter For speed conter is stored here. The value can be
A A
elapsed ch2 read and written by executing the F1 (DMV)
DT9105
value instruciton.
The target valeu (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT9106
instruction is stored here.
High-speed
For Target values have been preset for the various
counter A N/A
ch2 instructions, to be used when the high-speed
target value
counter related instruction is executed. The
DT9107
value can be read by executing the F1 (DMV)
instruction.
High-speed The elapsed value (24-bit data) for the high-
DT9108
counter For speed counter is stored here. The value can be
A A
elapsed ch3 read and written by executing the F1 (DMV)
DT9109
value instruction.
The target value (24-bit data) of the high-speed
counter specified by the high-speed counter
DT9110
instruction is stored here.
High-speed
For Target values have been preset for the various
counter A N/A
ch3 instructions, to be used when the high-speed
target value
counter related instruction is executed. The
DT9111
value can be read by executing the F1 (DMV)
instruction.

5-42
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.7 Table of System Registers for FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Starting number setting for
5 1008 0 to 1024
counter
Hold type area starting number
6 setting for timer and counter 1008 0 to 1024
(T32/F32)
Hold type area starting number
7 setting for internal relays 248 0 to 256
(T32/F32)
Hold/
Hold type area starting number
Non-
hold 1
8 setting for data registers 0 0 to 32765
(T32/F32)
Hold or non-hold setting for step
14 ladder process Non-hold Hold/Non-hold
(T32/F32)
Previous value is held for a
leading edge detection Hold/
4 Hold
instruction (DF instrucion) with Non-hold
Note)
MC
Hold type area starting word
10 number for PC(PLC) link relays 0 0 to 64
(for PC(PLC) link 0) (T32/F32)
Hold type area starting word
11 number for PC(PLC) link relays 64 64 to 128
Hold/
(for PC(PLC) link 1) (T32/F32)
Non-
Hold type area starting number
hold 2
12 for PC(PLC) link registers 0 0 to 128
(for PC(PLC) link 0) (T32/F32)
Hold type area starting number
13 for PC(PLC) link registers 128 128 to 256
(for PC(PLC) link 1) (T32/F32)
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Action
Operation setting when an I/O
on 23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
error
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Wait time setting for multi-frame 6500.0
31 10 to 81900 ms
communication ms
Communication timeout setting
Time 10000.0
32 for SEND/RECV, RMRD/RMWT 10 to 81900 ms
set- ms
commands
ting
0: Normal scan
Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 600 ms: Scans once each
time scan
specified time interval

5-43
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
41 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
Starting word number for link
PC 42 0 0 to 63
relay transmission
(PLC)
43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 0
Starting number for link data
set- 44 0 0 to 127
register tranmission
ting
Link data register transmission
45 0 0 to 127 words
size
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal/reverse
Maximum unit number setting
47 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
51 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
PC Starting word number for link
52 64 64 to 127
(PLC) relay transmission
link 1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
set- Starting number for link data
54 128 128 to 255
ting) register tranmission
Link data register transmission
55 0 0 to 127 words
size
Maximum unit number setting
57 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link

5-44
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R
No. Name Default value Descriptions
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X0, X1)
Two-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
Do not set input Decremental input (X0)
High-speed CH0
X0 as high-speed Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
counter
counter Individual input (X0, X1)
operation
400 Individual input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
mode
Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1)
settings (X0
Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1),
to X2)
Reset input (X2)
Controller input settings 1

Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.


CH1:
High-speed counter

Incremental input (X1)


Do not set input
CH1 Incremental inptu (X1), Reset input (X2)
X1 as high-speed
Decremental input (X1)
counter
Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2)
Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X3, X4)
Two-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
Incremental input (X3)
CH2: Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
Do not set input Decremental input (X5)
High-speed CH2
X3 as high-speed Decremental input (X5), Reset input (X5)
counter
counter Individual input (X3, X4)
operation
400 Individual input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
mode
Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4)
settings (X3
Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4),
to X5)
Reset input (X5)
Does not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
CH3:
Incremental input (X4)
Does not set
CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
input X4 as high-
Decremental input (X4)
speed counter
Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
Do not set input X6 as high-speed counter.
High-speed counter

CH4: Incremental input (X6)


Controller input

Do not set input Decremental input (X6)


High-speed CH4
settings 2

X6 as high-speed Two-phase input (X6, X7)


counter/
counter Individual input (X6, X7)
401 pulse output
Incremental/decremental control input (X6, X7)
settings
CH5:
(X6 to X7)
Do not set input X7 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input
CH5 Incremental input (X7)
X7 as high-speed
Decremental input (X7)
counter
Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH1 or CH3 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH5 is
invalid in system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the follwing
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter]→[Pulse catch]→[Interrupt input].
<Example>
When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.

5-45
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Normal output (Y0, Y1)
Pulse output (Y0, Y1)
CH0: Pulse output (Y0, Y1)/Home input X4
Normal
Controller output settings 2 (PLS/PWM)

Pulse output (Y0, Y1)/Home input X4/Position


output control starting input X0
PWM output (Y0), Normal output (Y1)
Transistor type C16 or over

Normal output (Y2, Y3)


Pulse output (Y2, Y3)
CH1: Pulse output (Y2, Y3)/Home input X5
Normal Pulse output (Y3, Y4)/Home input X5/Position
Pulse/ output control starting input X1
PWM output PWM output (Y2), Normal output (Y3)
402 Normal output (Y4, Y5)
settings
Pulse output (Y4, Y5)
(Y0 to Y7) CH2: Pulse output (Y4, Y5)/Home input X6
Normal Pulse output (Y4, Y5)/Home input X6/Position
output control starting input X2
PWM output (Y4), Normal output (Y5)
Normal output (Y6, Y7)
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)
CH3: Pulse output (Y6, Y7)/Home input X7
Normal Pulse output (Y6, Y7)/Home input X7/Position
output control starting input X3
PWM output (Y6), Normal output (Y7)

Inter- Pulse catch


403 Not set
rupt/ input settings
The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch.
Pulse
catch Interrupt input
settings 404 Not set
settings
The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input.
Inter-
Interrupt edge
rupt Leading
405 setting for
edge edge
settings controller input
The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge.
Note1) When using the pulse output/PWM output, the controller output settings must be specified.
The output that has been set to the pulse output/PWM output cannot be used as the normal
output.
Note2) X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3.
When using the home return function of the pulse output, always set the home input. In that
case, X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high-speed counter.
Note3) C16 type:
- For performing the home return for the pulse output CH0 with deviation counter clear, the
above Y6 should be set to the normal output to use Y6 for the deviation counter clear signal.
- For performing the home return for the pulse output CH1 with deviation counter clear, the
above Y7 should be set to the normal output to use Y7 for the deviation counter clear signal.
- The home return cannot be performed for the pulse output CH2 with deviation counter clear.
Note4) C32/T32/F32 type:
When performing theo home return with deviation counter clear, the deviation counter clear
signals corresponding to each CH are used fixedly as follows; CH0=Y8, CH1=Y9, CH2=YA,
CH3=YB
For performing the home return for each type,
it is necessary to specify the home input corresponding to each channel to be used for the home
return in the system register 401.
Home input corresponding to each channel: CH0=4, CH1=X5, CH2=X6, CH3=X7
For performing the JOG positioning for each type,
it is necessary to specify the position control starting input signal corresponding to each channel
to be used for the JOG positioning.
Note3) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 to
405.

5-46
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Communication Computer link
Computer link
mode setting General-purpose communications Note2)
412
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
Tool system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
port “General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None
set-
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
ting
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
420 4096 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
421 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication General-purpose serial communication
Computer link
mode setting PC(PLC) link
412
MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
COM format setting the communication mode specified by
Odd
port system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
set- “General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
ting
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
416 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings:
Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) The general-purpose communication with the tool port is available only in RUN mode. In PROG
mode, the computer link mode must be used regardless of settings.

5-47
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Controller input time
430 constant setting 1
X0 to X3 None
Cont- Controller input time 0.1 ms
roller 431 constant setting 1 0.5 ms
input X4 to X7 1 ms
time Controller input time 2 ms
1 ms
cons- constant setting 2 4 ms
tant 432 8 ms
X8 to XB
set- (C32/T32/F32) 16 ms
tings Controller input time 32 ms
constant setting 2 64 ms
433
XC to XF
(C32/T32/F32)
Note) X6 and X7 is invalid for C10.

5-48
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.8 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0R
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.

WR900 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Self-diagnostic Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
error flag ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.
R9001 Not used
R9002 Not used
R9003 Not used
I/O verification
R9004 Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
error flag
R9005 Not used
R9006 Not used
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error occurs.
Operation error
R9007 ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017.
flag (hold)
(indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error
R9008 ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
flag (non-hold)
DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation
R9009 Carry flag
results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger
R900A > Flag
in the comparison instructions (F60 to F63).
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions (F60 to F63).
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller
R900C < Flag
in the comparison instructions (F60 to F63).
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in the
Auxiliary timer timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM) auxiliary timer
R900D
instruction flag instruction. The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer
instruction turns off.
Tool port
R900E communication Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.
error
Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system
Constant scan
R900F register 34 during constant scan execution.
error flag
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-49
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR901 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Initial (on type) Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been
R9013
pulse relay started, and goes off for the second and subsequent scans.
Initial (off type) Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been
R9014
pulse relay started, and goes on for the second and subsequent scans.
Step ladder initial
Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the
R9015 pulse relay (on
step ladder control.
type)
R9016 Not used
R9017 Not used
0.01 s clock Repeats on/off operations in
R9018
pulse relay 0.01 sec. cycles.

0.02 s clock Repeats on/off operations in


R9019
pulse relay 0.02 s. cycles.

0.1 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.1


R901A
relay s. cycles.

0.2 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.2


R901B
relay s. cycles.

1 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1 s.


R901C
relay cycles.

2 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 2 s.


R901D
relay cycles.

1 min clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1


R901E
relay min. cycles.
R901F Not used
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-50
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR902 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used
R9022 Not used
R9023 Not used
R9024 Not used
R9025 Not used
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used
R9028 Not used
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay
R9029 Forcing flag
timer/counter contacts.
Interrupt enable Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL
R902A
flag instruction.
Interrupt error
R902B Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
flag
Sampling by the instruction=0
R902C Sample point flag
Sampling at constant time intervals=1
Sample trace end When the sampling operation stops=1,
R902D
flag When the sampling operation starts=0
Sampling stop When the sampling stop trigger activates=1
R902E
trigger flag When the sampling stop trigger stops=0
Sampling enable When sampling starts=1
R902F
flag When sampling stops=0
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-51
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR903 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
R9030 Not used
R9031 Not used
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication function
COM port
is being used
R9032 communication mode
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL-COM or the PLC link
flag
function is being used.
Print instruction Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033
execution flag On: Execution is in progress.
RUN overwrite Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a rewrite
R9034
complete flag during the RUN operation.
R9035 Not used
R9036 Not used
- Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data
COM port
communication.
R9037 communication error
- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag
F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM port reception
done flag during - Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038
general purpose purpose serial communication.
communication
COM port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-
transmission done
purpose serial communication.
R9039 flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose
purpose serial
serial communication.
communication
R903A Not used
R903B Not used
R903C Not used
R903D Not used
TOOL port reception
done flag during - Turns on the terminator is received during general -purpose
R903E
general purpose serial communication.
communication
TOOL port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-
transmission done
purpose serial communication.
R903F flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose
purpose serial
serial communication.
communication
A: Available, N/A: Not available
Note) R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan.

5-52
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR904 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
TOOL port - Turns on when the general-purpose communication function is being
R9040 operation mode used
flag - Goes off when the computer link function is being used.
COM port PLC
R9041 Turn on while the PLC link function is used.
link flag
R9042 Not used
R9043 Not used
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions can
COM port
be executed or not.
SEND/RECV
R9044 Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.
instruction
(During executing the instruction)
execution flag
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.
COM port Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of
SEND/RECV the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions as follows:
R9045 instruction Off: No abonormality detected.
execution end On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
flag End code: DT90124
R9046 Not used
R9047 Not used
R9048 Not used
R9049 Not used
R904A Not used
R904B Not used
R904C
Not used
to R904F
A: Available, N/A: Not available
Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan.
WR905 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
MEWNET-W0
When using MEWNET-W0
PLC link
R9050 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link.
transmission
- Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings.
error flag
R9051 to
Not used
R905F

5-53
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR906 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9060 No.1 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9061 No.2 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9062 No.3 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9063 No.4 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9064 No.5 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9065 No.6 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9066 No.7 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
MEWNET- occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9067 PC(PLC) No.8 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
link 0 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
trans- Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9068 mission Unit link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
assurance No.9 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
relay Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
R9069 Unit PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
No.10 an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
R906A No.11 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
R906B No.12 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
R906C No.13 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
R906D No.14 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
R906E No.15 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
R906F No.16 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-54
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR907 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9070
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9071
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9072
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9073
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9074
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9075
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9076
MEWNET- No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9077
PC(PLC) No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
link 0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9078
operation No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
mode relay Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9079
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R907A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R907B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R907C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R907D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R907E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R907F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-55
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR908 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9080 No.1 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9081 No.2 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9082 No.3 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9083 No.4 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9084 No.5 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9085 No.6 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9086 No.7 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
MEWNET- occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9087 PC(PLC) No.8 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
link 1 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
trans- Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9088 mission Unit link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
assurance No.9 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
relay Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9089 Unit link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.10 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908A No.11 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908B No.12 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908C No.13 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908D No.14 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908E No.15 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908F No.16 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-56
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR909 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9090
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9091
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9092
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9093
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9094
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9095
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9096
MEWNET- No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9097
PC(PLC) No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
link 1 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9098
operation No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
mode relay Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9099
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R909A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R909B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R909C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R909D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R909E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R909F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-57
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR910 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
R9110 HSC-CH0
- Turns on the channel of high-speed counter during the
R9111 HSC-CH1
High-speed control using F165(CAM0), F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R),
R9112 HSC-CH2
counter F178(PLSM) instructions.
R9113 HSC-CH3
control flag - Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is
R9114 HSC-CH4
completed.
R9115 HSC-CH5
R9116 to
Not used
R911F
R9120 PLS-CH0
Pulse output - Turns on while the pulses are being output using
R9121 PLS-CH1
instruction F171(SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F173(PWMH), F174 (SP0H),
R9122 PLS-CH2
flag F175(SPSH), F177(HOME) instructions.
R9123 PLS-CH3
R9124 to
Not used
R912F
R9130 PLS-CH0 - Turns on the channel of pulse output during the control
R9131 Pulse output PLS-CH1 using F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R) instructions.
R9132 control flag PLS-CH2 - Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is
R9133 PLS-CH3 completed.
R9134 to
Not used
R913F
A: Available, N/A: Not available

5-58
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.9 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0R
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT90000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT90001 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90002 Not used N/A N/A
DT90003 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90004 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90005 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90006 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90007 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90008 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90009 Not used - N/A N/A
When the state of installation of FP0
expansion I/O unit has changed since the
power was turned on, the bit corresponding to
Extension (right side) the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary
DT90010 I/O verify error unit display. A N/A
[0 to 3]

DT90011 Not used - N/A N/A


DT90012 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90013 Not used - N/A N/A

5-59
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction,
DT90014 register for data shift F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The A A
instruction value can be read and written by executing F0
(MV) instruction.

The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in


DT90015 DT90015 when the division instruction F32(%) A A
or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The
Operation auxiliary
divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
register for division
DT90015 and DT90016 when the division
instruction
instruction F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is
DT90016 executed. The value can be read and written A A
by executing F0(MV) instruction.

After commencing operation, the address


Operation error where the first operation error occurred is
DT90017 A N/A
address (hold type) stored. Monitor the address using decimal
display.
The address where an operation error
Operation error occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs,
DT90018 A N/A
address (latest type) the new address overwrites the previous
address.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
2.5 ms ring counter
DT90019 Note1) Difference between the values of the two A N/A
points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed
time between the two points.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 10.67 μs. (H0 to HFFFF)
10 μs ring counter Difference between the values of the two
DT90020 Note1) Note2) A N/A
points (absolute value) x 10.67 μs = Elapsed
time between the two points.
Note) The exact value is 10.67 μs.
DT90021 Not used - N/A N/A
Note1) It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan.
Note2) As DT90020 is renewed even if F0(MV), DT90020 and D instruction is being executed, it can be
used to measure the block time.

5-60
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The current scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (current
DT90022 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (minimum
DT90023 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (maximum
DT90024 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
monitoring register
DT90025 A N/A
for interrupts
(INT0 to 11)

DT90026 Not used - N/A N/A


The value set by ICTL instruction is stored.
Periodical interrupt
DT90027 K0: periodical interrupt is not used. A N/A
interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s
K0: Sampling by the SMPL instruction
DT90028 Sample trace interval A N/A
K1 to K3000 (x 10 ms): 10 ms to 30 s
DT90029 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90030
DT90031 The contents of the specified message (Data
DT90032 Character storage by length) are stored in these special data
A N/A
DT90033 F149 MSG instruction registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is
DT90034 executed.
DT90035
DT90036 Not used - N/A N/A
Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In PROG.
mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are
cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.

5-61
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The number of data that match the searched
Work1 for SRC
DT90037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) A N/A
instructions
insturction is executed.
The position of the first matching data is
Work2 for SRC
DT90038 stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is A N/A
instructions
executed.
DT90039 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90040 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90041 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90042 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90043 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90044 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90045 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90046 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90047 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90048 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90049 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90050 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90051 Not used - N/A N/A
The pulse output instruction can be continued
or cleared by writing a value with MV
instruction (F0).
Control code setting

High-speed counter
DT90052 A A
control flag

5-62
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.

Control code setting

Pulse output control


DT90052 A A
flag

5-63
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Hour and minute data of the clock/calender
are stored here. This data is read-only data. It
cannot be overwritten.
Clock/calender
DT90053 monitor (hour/minute) A N/A
(T32 only)

The year, month, day, hour, minute, second


Clock/calender setting and day-of-the-week data for the
DT90054 (minute/second) clock/calender is stored. The built-in
(T32 only) clock/calender will operate correctly through
the year 2099 and supports leap years. The
Clock/calender setting clock/calender can be set by writing a value
DT90055 (day/hour) using a programming tool software or a
(T32 only) program that uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see
example for DT90058)
Clock/calender setting
DT90056 (year/month) A A
(T32 only)

Clock/calender setting
DT90057 (day-of-the-week)
(T32 only)
As a day of the week is not automatially set on
FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.

5-64
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The clock/calender is adjusted as follows.
When setting the clock/calender by
program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the
time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot
be performed with any instruction other than
F0 (MV) instruction.)

<Example>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
the X0 turns on.

Note) If the values of DT90054 to DT90057


Clock/calender setting are changed with the programming tool
and 30 seconds software, the time will be set when the new
DT90058 A A
correction register values are written. Therefore, it is
(T32 only) unnecessary to write to DT90058.

When the correcting times less than 30


seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become
exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is
completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0.

Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0: on

At the time of coorection, if between 0 and 29


seconds, it will be moved down, and if
between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved
up.
In the example above, if the time was 5
minutes 29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes
0 seconds;and, if the time was 5 minutes 35
seconds, it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds.
Communication error Error code is sotred here when a
DT90059 N/A N/A
code communication error occurs.

5-65
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90060
(0 to 15)
Step ladder process
DT90061
(16 to 31)
Step ladder process
DT90062
(32 to 47)
Step ladder process
DT90063
(48 to 63)
Step ladder process
DT90064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT90065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT90066
(96 to 111)
Step ladder process
DT90067
(112 to 127)
Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process
DT90068 ladder process. When the process starts up,
(128 to 143)
the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process
DT90069 turns on.
(144 to 159)
Step ladder process
DT90070 Monitor using binary display.
(160 to 175) A
A Note)
Step ladder process
DT90071
(176 to 191)
Step ladder process
DT90072
(192 to 207)
Step ladder process
DT90073 Note) A programming tool software can be
(208 to 223)
used to write data.
Step ladder process
DT90074
(224 to 239)
Step ladder process
DT90075
(240 to 255)
Step ladder process
DT90076
(256 to 271)
Step ladder process
DT90077
(272 to 287)
Step ladder process
DT90078
(288 to 303)
Step ladder process
DT90079
(304 to 319)
Step ladder process
DT90080
(320 to 335)
Step ladder process
DT90081
(336 to 351)

5-66
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90082
(352 to 367)
Step ladder process
DT90083
(368 to 383)
Step ladder process
DT90084
(384 to 399)
Step ladder process
DT90085
(400 to 415)
Step ladder process
DT90086
(416 to 431)
Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process
DT90087 ladder process. When the process starts up,
(432 to 447)
the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process
DT90088 turns on .
(448 to 463)
Step ladder process
DT90089 Monitor using binary display.
(464 to 479) A
A Note)
Step ladder process
DT90090
(480 to 495)
Step ladder process
DT90091
(496 to 511)
Step ladder process
DT90092 Note) A programming tool software can be
(512 to 527)
used to write data.
Step ladder process
DT90093
(528 to 543)
Step ladder process
DT90094
(544 to 559)
Step ladder process
DT90095
(560 to 575)
Step ladder process
DT90096
(576 to 591)
Step ladder process
DT90097
(592 to 607)

5-67
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90098
(608 to 623)
Step ladder process
DT90099
(624 to 639)
Step ladder process
DT90100
(640 to 655)
Step ladder process
DT90101
(656 to 671)
Step ladder process
DT90102
(672 to 687)
Step ladder process
DT90103
(688 to 703)
Step ladder process
DT90104
(704 to 719)
Step ladder process
DT90105
(720 to 735)
Step ladder process
DT90106
(736 to 751)
Step ladder process
DT90107 Indicates the startup condition of the step
(752 to 767)
Step ladder process
ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90108 the bit corresponding to the process number
(768 to 783)
Step ladder process turns on.
DT90109
(784 to 799)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display
DT90110
(800 to 815)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90111
(816 to 831)
Step ladder process
DT90112
(832 to 847)
Step ladder process
DT90113
(848 to 863)
A programming tool software can be used to
Step ladder process
DT90114 write data.
(864 to 879)
Step ladder process
DT90115
(880 to 895)
Step ladder process
DT90116
(896 to 911)
Step ladder process
DT90117
(912 to 927)
Step ladder process
DT90118
(928 to 943)
Step ladder process
DT90119
(944 to 959)
Step ladder process
DT90120
(960 to 975)
Step ladder process
DT90121
(976 to 991)
Step ladder process
DT90122 (992 to 999)
(higher byte is not used.)

5-68
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90123 Not used - N/A N/A
COM SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90124 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
DT90125 Not used - N/A N/A
Forced ON/OFF
DT90126 operating station Used by the system N/A N/A
display
DT90127
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90139
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90140
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90141
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90142
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90143
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90144
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90145
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90146
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90147
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90148
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90149
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90150
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90151
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90152
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90153
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90154
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90155
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90156
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90157
interval.

5-69
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90158
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90159
interval.
MEWNET-W0
DT90160 Stores the unit No. of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 unit No.
MEWNET-W0
DT90161 PC(PLC) link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
flag
DT90162
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90169
Duplicated destination for PC(PLC) inter-link
DT90170
address
DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.
Counts how many times two or more tokens
DT90172
are detected.
DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
No. of times underfined commands have
DT90174
been received.
MEWNET-W0
No. of times sum check errors have occurred A N/A
DT90175 PC(PLC) link 0 status
during reception.
No. of times format errors have occurred in
DT90176
received data.
No. of times transmission errors have
DT90177
occurred.
DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.
No. of times overlapping parent units have
DT90179
occurred.
DT90180
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90189
DT90190 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90191 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90192 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90193 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90194
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90218

5-70
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Unit No. (Station No.)
0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8,
DT90219 selection for DT90220 to A A
1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16
DT90251
System regis-
DT90220
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90221 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis- The contents of the system register settings
DT90222 (station)
ter 44 and 45 partaining to the PLC inter-link function for
No. 1 or 9
System regis- the various unit numbers are stored as
DT90223
ter 46 and 47 shown below.
System regis-
DT90224
ter 40 and 41 <Example>
PC(PLC)
System regis- When DT90219 is 0
DT90225 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90226 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 2 or 10
System regis-
DT90227
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90228
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90229 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit A N/A
System regis- • When the system register 46 in the home
DT90230 (station)
ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting, the values in
No. 3 or 11
System regis- the home unit are copied in the system
DT90231
ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47.
System regis- When the system register 46 in the home
DT90232
ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting, the registers
PC(PLC)
System regis- 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the
DT90233 link
ter 42 and 43 home unit mentioned in the left column will
Unit
System regis- be changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
DT90234 (station)
ter 44 and 45 system register 46 will be set as it is.
No. 4 or 12
System regis- Also, the system registers 40 to 45
DT90235 corresponding to other units will be
ter 46 and 47
System regis- changed to the values which the received
DT90236 values are corrected, and the registers 46
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) and 57 in the home unit are set for the
System regis-
DT90237 link registers 46 and 47.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90238 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 5 or 13
System regis-
DT90239
ter 46 and 47

5-71
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
System regis- The contents of the system register
DT90240
ter 40 and 41 settings partaining to the PLC inter-link
PC(PLC) System regis-
function for the various unit numbers are
DT90241 link stored as shown below.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
(station) System regis- <Example> when DT90219 is 0.
DT90242
No. 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45

System regis-
DT90243
ter 46 and 47

System regis-
DT90244
ter 40 and 41

PC(PLC) System regis-


DT90245 link ter 42 and 43
• When the system register 46 in the
Unit (sta- home unit is in the standard setting, the A N/A
tion) No. 7 System regis- values in the home unit are copied in
DT90246
or 15 ter 44 and 45 the system registers 46 and 47.
When the system register 46 in the
System regis- home unit is in the reverse setting, the
DT90247
ter 46 and 47 registers 40 to 45 and 47
System regis-
corresponding to the home unit
DT90248 mentioned in the left column will be
ter 40 and 41
changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
PC(PLC) System regis- system register 46 will be set as it is.
DT90249 link ter 42 and 43 Also, the system registers 40 to 45
Unit (sta- corresponding to other units will be
tion) No. 8 System regis- changed to the values which the
DT90250
or 16 ter 44 and 45 received values are corrected, and the
System regis-
registers 46 and 57 in the home unit
DT90251 are set for the registers 46 and 47.
ter 46 and 47

DT90252 Not used


DT90253 Not used
N/A N/A
DT90254 Not used
DT90255 Not used
DT90256 Not used N/A N/A

5-72
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X0) or
DT90300 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X0, X1) of the main unit.
value
DT90301 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH0
The target value is set when
DT90302 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90303 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X1) of


DT90304 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
the main unit.
value
DT90305 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH1
The target value is set when
DT90306 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90307 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X2) or


DT90308 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X2, X3) of the main unit.
value
DT90309 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH2
The target value is set when
DT90310 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90311 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X3) of


DT90312 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
the main unit.
value
DT90313 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH3
The target value is set when
DT90314 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90315 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X4) or


DT90316 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X4, X5) of the main unit.
value
DT90317 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH4
The target value is set when
DT90318 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90319 area Higher words A A Note)

Note) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.

5-73
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X5) of A
DT90320 Elapsed Lower words A Note1)
value the main unit.
A
DT90321 area Higher words A Note1)
HSC-CH5
The target value is set when A
DT90322 Target Lower words A Note1)
value instructions F166 (HC1S) and
F167 (HC1R) are executed. A
DT90323 area Higher words A Note1)

DT90324 Not used N/A N/A


DT90325 Not used N/A N/A
DT90326 Not used N/A N/A
DT90327 Not used N/A N/A
DT90328 Not used N/A N/A
DT90329 Not used N/A N/A
DT90330 Not used N/A N/A
DT90331 Not used N/A N/A
DT90332 Not used N/A N/A
DT90333 Not used N/A N/A
DT90334 Not used N/A N/A
DT90335 Not used N/A N/A
DT90336 Not used N/A N/A
DT90337 Not used N/A N/A
DT90338 Not used N/A N/A
DT90339 Not used N/A N/A
DT90340 Not used N/A N/A
DT90341 Not used N/A N/A
DT90342 Not used N/A N/A
DT90343 Not used N/A N/A
DT90344 Not used N/A N/A
DT90345 Not used N/A N/A
DT90346 Not used N/A N/A
DT90347 Not used N/A N/A
DT90348 Not used N/A N/A
DT90349 Not used N/A N/A
DT90350 Not used N/A N/A
DT90351 Not used N/A N/A
DT90352 Not used N/A N/A
DT90353 Not used N/A N/A
DT90354 Not used N/A N/A
DT90355 Not used N/A N/A
DT90356 Not used N/A N/A
DT90357 Not used N/A N/A
DT90358 Not used N/A N/A
DT90359 Not used N/A N/A
DT90360 Not used N/A N/A
DT90361 Not used N/A N/A
DT90362 Not used N/A N/A
DT90363 Not used N/A N/A
Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.

5-74
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90370 HSC-CH0 When HSC control is executed by A N/A
DT90371 HSC-CH1 F0 (MV)S, DT90052 instruction, A N/A
DT90372 Control flag monitor HSC-CH2 the setting value for the target CH A N/A
DT90373 area HSC-CH3 is stored in each CH. A N/A
DT90374 HSC-CH4 A N/A
DT90375 HSC-CH5 A N/A
DT90376 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90377 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90378 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90379 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90380 PLS-CH0 When pulse output control is A N/A
Control flag monitor
DT90381 PLS-CH1 executed by F0 (MV)S, DT90052 A N/A
area (Transistor
DT90382 PLS-CH2 instruction, the setting value for the A N/A
output type only)
DT90383 PLS-CH3 target CH is stored in each CH. A N/A
DT90384 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90385 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90386 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90387 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90388 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90389 Not used - N/A N/A

5-75
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90400 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90401 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90402 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90403 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90404 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90405 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90406 speed of initial CH0 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90407 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90408 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90409 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.
DT90410 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90411 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90412 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90413 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90414 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90415 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90416 speed of initial CH1 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90417 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90418 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90419 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.

5-76
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90420 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90421 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90422 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90423 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90424 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90425 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90426 speed of initial CH2 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90427 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90428 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90429 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.
DT90430 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90431 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90432 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90433 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90434 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90435 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90436 speed of initial CH3 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90437 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90438 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90439 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.

5-77
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.10 Table of System Registers for FPΣ
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Starting number setting for
5 1008 0 to 1024 • These settings are
counter
Hold type area starting number effective if the
6 1008 0 to 1024 optional backup
setting for timer and counter
12k: 90 battery is installed.
Hold type area starting number 12k: 0 to 98 • If no backup
7 32k: 0 to
setting for internal relays 32k: 0 to 256
Hold/ 256 battery is used, do
Non- Hold type area starting number not change the
8 32710 0 to 32765
hold 1 setting for data registers default settings.
Hold or non-hold setting for step Otherwise proper
14 Non-hold Hold/Non-hold
ladder process functioning of
Previous value is held for a hold/non-hold
leading edge detection Hold/ values cannot be
4 Hold
instruction (DF instrucion) with Non-hold
Note) guaranteed.
MC
Hold type area starting word
10 number for PC(PLC) link relays 64 0 to 64
(for PC(PLC) link 0)
Hold type area starting word
128
11 number for PC(PLC) link relays 64 to 128
Hold/ (32k only)
(for PC(PLC) link 1)
Non-
Hold type area starting number
hold 2
12 for PC(PLC) link registers 128 0 to 128
(for PC(PLC) link 0)
Hold type area starting number
256
13 for PC(PLC) link registers 128 to 256
(32k only)
(for PC(PLC) link 1)
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Operation setting when an I/O
23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Action
Dis- When a battery error occurs,
on
abled: a self-diagnostic error is not
error
issued and the ERROR/
Alarm battery error
ALARM LED does not flash.
4 (Operating setting when Disabled
battery error occurs) Ena- When a battery error occurs,
bled: a self-diagnostic error is
issued and the ERROR/
ALARM LED flashes.
Note) The 12k type is available with Ver. 1.4 to 1.9, 2.4 or later.

5-78
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Wait time setting for multi-frame 6500.0
31 10 to 81900 ms
communication ms
Communication timeout setting
Time 10000.0
32 for SEND/RECV, RMRD/RMWT 10 to 81900 ms
set- ms
commands
ting
0: Normal scan
Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 350 ms: Scans once each
time scan
specified time interval
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
41 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
Starting word number for link
42 0 0 to 63
PC relay transmission
(PLC) 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 0 Starting number for link data
44 0 0 to 127
set- register tranmission
ting Link data register transmission
45 0 0 to 127 words
size
Normal
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal/reverse
(32k only)
Maximum unit number setting
47 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
51 0 0 to 128 words
PC used for PC(PLC) link
(PLC) Starting word number for link
52 64 64 to 127
link 1 relay transmission
set- 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
ting Starting number for link data
54 128 128 to 255
(32k register tranmission
only) Link data register transmission
55 0 0 to 127 words
size
Maximum unit number setting
57 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link

5-79
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X0, X1)
Two-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
Do not set Decremental input (X0)
input X0 Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
CH0
as high- incremental/decremental input (X0, X1)
speed incremental/decremental input (X0, X1),
High-speed counter Reset input (X2)
counter Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
400 operation mode
settings (X0 to X2) X1)
Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
X1), Reset input (X2)
CH1:
Do not set Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X1)
input X1
CH1 Incremental inptu (X1), Reset input (X2)
as high- Decremental input (X1)
speed Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2)
High-
counter
speed
Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
coun- Two-phase input (X3, X4)
ter Two-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
Incremental input (X3)
CH2: Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
Do not set Decremental input (X5)
input X3 Decremental input (X5), Reset input (X5)
CH2 Incremental/decremental input (X3, X4)
as high-
speed Incremental/decremental input (X3, X4),
Reset input (X5)
High-speed counter counter Incremental/decremental control
401 operation mode (X3, X4)
settings (X3 to X5) Incremental/decremental control
(X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
HC3:
Does not Does not set input X4 as high-speed
set input counter.
Incremental input (X4)
X4 as CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
high- Decremental input (X4)
speed Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
counter

5-80
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value

Pulse catch input


402 Not set
settings Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch
input.

Inter-
rupt-
input Specify the input contacts used as intrrupt
Interrupt input input.
403 Not set
settings

Specify the effective interrupt edge.


(When set: ON→OFF is valid)
Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH1 is invalid in part 2 of system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is
invalid in part2 of system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and
403.
Note4) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay,the follwing
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter]→[Pulse catch]→[Interrupt input].
<Example>
When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.

5-81
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Communication Computer link
Computer link
mode setting General-purpose communications
412
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
system register 412 has been set to
Tool Stop bit: 1 bit
“General-purpose serial communication”.
port
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None
set-
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
ting
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
420 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
421 received of general 0 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication General-purpose serial communication
Computer link
mode setting PC(PLC) link
412
MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
COM format setting the communication mode specified by
Odd
system register 412 has been set to
1 port Stop bit: 1 bit
“General-purpose serial communication”.
set-
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None
ting
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
416 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings:
Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
The transmission speed of the RS485 port (COM1) of AFPG806 must be identically set by the
system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette.

5-82
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
411 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication
Computer link General-purpose serial communication
mode setting
412 MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/odd/even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
414 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
“General-purpose serial communication”.
COM
- Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
2
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
port
2400 bps
set-
4800 bps
ting
Communication 9600 bps
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps
setting 38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
416 2048 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings:
the data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
The transmission speed of the RS485 port (COM1) of AFPG806 must be identically set by the
system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette.

5-83
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.11 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPΣ
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.

WR900
Relay No. Name Description
Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000 Self-diagnostic error flag ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in
DT90000.
R9001 Not used
R9002 Not used
R9003 Not used
R9004 I/O verification error flag Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
Backup battery error flag
R9005 Turns on when an backup battery error occurs.
(non-hold)
Turns on when a backup battery error occurs.
Once a battery error has been detected, this is held even
Backup battery error flag
R9006 after recovery has been made.
(hold)
It goes off if the power supply is turned off, or if the
system is initialized.
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error
occurs.
Operation error flag
R9007 ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in
(hold)
DT90017. (indicates the first operation error which
occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error flag ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored
R9008
(non-hold) in DT90018. The contents change each time a new error
occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the
R9009 Carry flag calculation results, and as a result of a shift system
instruction being executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900A > Flag
larger in the comparison instructions.
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions.
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900C < Flag
smaller in the comparison instructions.
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in
Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM)
R900D
instruction flag auxiliary timer instruction. The flag turns off when the
trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off.
Tool port
R900E Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.
communication error
Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in
R900F Constant scan error flag system register 34 during constant scan execution.
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.

5-84
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR901
Relay No. Name Description
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (on type) pulse
R9013 been started, and goes off for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (off type) pulse
R9014 been started, and goes on for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Step ladder initial pulse Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at
R9015
relay (on type) the step ladder control.
R9016 Not used -
R9017 Not used -
Repeats on/off operations in 0.01
R9018 0.01 s clock pulse relay
sec. cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s.


R9019 0.02 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.1 s.


R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 0.2 s.


R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 1 s.


R901C 1 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 2 s.


R901D 2 s clock pulse relay
cycles.

Repeats on/off operations in 1 min.


R901E 1 min clock pulse relay
cycles.
R901F Not used -

5-85
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR902
Relay No. Name Description
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used
R9022 Not used
R9023 Not used
R9024 Not used
R9025 Not used
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used
R9028 Not used
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output
R9029 Forcing flag
relay timer/counter contacts.
Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by
R902A Interrupt enable flag
the ICTL instruction.
R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
Sampling by the instruction=0
R902C Sample point flag Note)
Sampling at constant time intervals=1
Sample trace end flag When the sampling operation stops=1,
R902D Note)
When the sampling operation starts=0
Sampling stop trigger When the sampling stop trigger activates=1
R902E
flag Note) When the sampling stop trigger stops=0
Sampling enable flag When sampling starts=1
R902F Note)
When sampling stops=0
Note) Available for the 32k type only.

5-86
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR903
Relay No. Name Description
R9030 Not used -
R9031 Not used -
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication
COM1 port
function is being used
R9032 communication mode
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL-COM or the PLC link
flag
function is being used.
Print instruction Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033
execution flag On: Execution is in progress.
RUN overwrite complete Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a
R9034
flag rewrite during the RUN operation.
R9035 Not used -
R9036 Not used -
- Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data
COM1 port
communication.
R9037 communication error
- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag
F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM1 port reception
- Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038 done flag during general
purpose serial communication.
purpose communication
COM1 port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R9039
general-purpose serial - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose serial communication.
High-speed Turn on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903A counter control ch0 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F171(SPDH) to F176(PWMH) are executed.
High-speed Turn on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903B counter control ch1 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F171(SPDH) to F176(PWMH) are executed.
High-speed Turn on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903C counter control ch2 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F171(SPDH) to F176(PWMH) are executed.
High-speed Turn on while the high-speed counter instructions
R903D counter control ch3 F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions
flag F171(SPDH) to F176(PWMH) are executed.
TOOL port reception
- Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R903E done flag during general
purpose serial communication.
purpose communication
TOOL port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R903F
general-purpose serial - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose serial communication.
Note) R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan.

5-87
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR904
Relay No. Name Description
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication
TOOL port operation
R9040 function is being used
mode flag - Goes off when the computer link function is being used.
R9041 COM1 port PLC link flag Turn on while the PLC link function is used.
COM2 port - Goes on when the general-purpose serial communication
R9042 communication mode is used.
flag - Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used.
R9043 Not used -
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
instructions can be executed or not.
COM1 port SEND/RECV Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be
R9044 instruction execution executed. (During executing the instruction)
flag On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be
executed.
Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
COM1 port SEND/RECV instructions as follows:
R9045 instruction execution Off: No abonormality detected.
end flag On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
The error code is stored in DT90039.
End code: DT90124
R9046 Not used -
- Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data
COM2 port communication.
R9047 communication error - Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM2 port port
reception done flag - Turn on when the terminator is received during general-
R9048 during general-purpose purpose serial communication.
communicating
COM2 port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R9049 general-purpose - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose communication.
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
instructions can be executed or not.
COM2 port SEND/RECV Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be
R904A instruction execution executed. (During executing the instruction)
flag On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be
executed.
Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
COM2 port SEND/RECV instructions as follows:
R904B instruction execution Off: No abonormality detected.
end flag On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
The error code is stored in DT90039.
End code: DT90125
R904C to Not used -
R904D
Circular interpolation Goes on when the F176 (SPCH) circular interpolation
R904E control flag instruction is executed.
Circular interpolation It is used to overwrite next data when the circular
R904F data overwrite interpolation instruction is used in the continuation mode.
confirmation flag
Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan.
WR905
Relay No. Name Description
When using MEWNET-W0
MEWNET-W0 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link.
R9050 PLC link transmission - Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area
error flag settings.
R9051 to Not used
R905F

5-88
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR906
Relay No. Name Description
Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9060 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.1
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9061 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.2
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9062 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.3
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9063 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.4
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9064 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.5
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9065 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.6
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9066 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.7
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
MEWNET-W0 Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9067 PC(PLC) link PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.8
0 when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
transmission Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9068 assurance PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.9
relay when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9069 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.10
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906A PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.11
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906B PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.12
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906C PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.13
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906D PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.14
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906E PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.15
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906F PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.16
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.

5-89
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR907
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9070
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9071
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9072
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9073
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9074
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9075
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9076
No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
MEWNET-W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9077
PC(PLC) link 0 No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
operation Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9078
mode relay No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9079
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R907A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R907B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R907C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R907D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R907E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R907F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.

5-90
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR908
Relay No. Name Description
Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9080 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.1
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9081 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.2
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9082 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.3
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9083 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.4
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9084 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.5
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9085 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.6
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9086 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.7
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
MEWNET-W0
Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in
PC(PLC) link Unit
R9087 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
1 No.8
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
transmission
Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in
assurance Unit
R9088 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
relay No.9
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
(32k only)
Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9089 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.10
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908A PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.11
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908B PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.12
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908C PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.13
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908D PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.14
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908E PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.15
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908F PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.16
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.

5-91
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
WR909
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9090
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9091
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9092
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9093
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9094
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9095
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9096
No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
MEWNET-W0
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9097 PC(PLC) link 1
No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
operation
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9098 mode relay
No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
(32k only)
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9099
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R909A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R909B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R909C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R909D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R909E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R909F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.

5-92
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.12 Table of Special Data Registers for FPΣ
The special data registers are one word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific information.

(A: Available, N/A: Not available)


Register Read Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. -ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT90000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT90001 Not used N/A N/A
When an error occurs at FPΣ expansion I/O
unit, the bit corresponding to the unit No. will
Position of abnormal be set on “1”. Monitor using binary display.
DT90002 I/O unit for FPΣ left A N/A
side expansion

DT90003 Not used N/A N/A


DT90004 Not used N/A N/A
DT90005 Not used N/A N/A

When an error condition is detected in an


intelligent unit, the bit corresponding to the unit
Position of abnormal No. will turn on . Monitor using binary display.
DT90006 intelligent unit for FPΣ A N/A
left side expansion

DT90007 Not used N/A N/A


DT90008 Not used N/A N/A
Communication error Stores the error contents when using COM2
DT90009 A N/A
flag for COM2 port.
When the state of installation of FP0
expansion I/O unit has changed since the
power was turned on, the bit corresponding to
Position of I/O verify the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary
DT90010 error unit for FP0 right display. A N/A
side expansion

5-93
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. -ing ing
When the state of installation of an FPΣ
expansion I/O unit has changed since the
power was turned on, the bit corresponding to
Position of I/O verify the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary
DT90011 error unit for FPΣ left display. A N/A
side expansion

DT90012 Not used N/A N/A


DT90013 Not used N/A N/A
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction,
DT90014 register for data shift F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The A A
instruction value can be read and written by executing F0
(MV) instruction.
The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in
DT90015 when the division instruction F32(%)
DT90015 or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The A A
Operation auxiliary
divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
register for division
DT90015 and DT90016 when the division
instruction
instruction F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is executed.
DT90016 The value can be read and written by A A
executing F0(MV) instruction.
After commencing operation, the address
Operation error where the first operation error occurred is
DT90017 A N/A
address (hold type) stored. Monitor the address using decimal
display.
The address where an operation error
occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs,
Operation error
the new address overwrites the previous
DT90018 address (non-hold A N/A
address. At the beginning of a scan, the
type)
address is 0. Monitor the address using
decimal display.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
2.5 ms ring counter
DT90019 Note1) Difference between the values of the two A N/A
points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed
time between the two points.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 10.24 μs. (H0 to HFFFF)
10 μs ring counter Difference between the values of the two
DT90020 A N/A
points (absolute value) x 10.24 μs = Elapsed
Note1) Note2)

time between the two points.


Note) The exact value is 10.24 μs.
DT90021 Not used N/A N/A
Note1) It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan.
Note2) As DT90020 is renewed even if F0(MV), DT90020 and D instruction is being executed, it can be
used to measure the block time.

5-94
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. -ing ing
The current scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (current
DT90022 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (minimum
DT90023 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (maximum
DT90024 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
monitoring register
DT90025 A N/A
for interrupts
(INT0 to 7)

DT90026 Not used N/A N/A


The value set by ICTL instruction is stored.
Periodical interrupt
DT90027 K0: periodical interrupt is not used. A N/A
interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s
DT90028 Not used N/A N/A
DT90029 Not used N/A N/A
DT90030 Message 0
DT90031 Message 1 The contents of the specified message (Data
DT90032 Message 2 lenght) are stored in these special data
A N/A
DT90033 Message 3 registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is
DT90034 Message 4 executed.
DT90035 Message 5
DT90036 Not used N/A N/A
Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In PROG.
mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are
cleared earh time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.

5-95
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
Operation auxiliary The number of data that match the searched
DT90037 register for search data is stored here when F96 (SRC) A N/A
instruction F96(SRC) insturction is executed.
Operation auxiliary The position of the first matching data is
DT90038 register for search stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is A N/A
instruction F96(SRC) executed.
DT90039 Not used N/A N/A
Potentiometer The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is
DT90040
(volume) input V0 stored here. This value can be used in analog
tiemrs and other applications by using the
A N/A
Potentiometer program to read this value to a data register.
DT90041
(volume) input V1 V0→DT90040
V1→DT90041
DT90042 Used by the system. N/A N/A
DT90043 Used by the system. N/A N/A
The elapsed value (32-bit data) of the high-
DT90044 High-speed
For speed counter is stored here. The value can
counter A A
CH0 be read or written by executing F1 (DMV)
DT90045 elapsed value
instruction.

The targe value (32-bit data) of the high-


DT90046 speed counter specified by the high-speed
counter instruction is stored here. Target
High-speed
For values have been preset for the various
counter target A N/A
CH0 instructions to be used when the high-speed
value
counter related instruction F166, F167, F171,
DT90047 F175 or F176 is executed. The value can be
read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

High-speed The elapsed value (32-bit data) of the high-


DT90048
counter For speed counter is stored here. The value can
A A
elapsed value CH1 be read and written by executing F1 (DMV)
DT90049
area instruction.

The target value (32-bit data) of the high-


DT90050 speed counter specified by the high-speed
counter instruction is stored here. Target
High-speed
For values have been preset for the various
counter target A N/A
CH1 instructions to be used when the high-speed
value area
counter related instruction F166 or F167 is
DT90051 executed. The value can be read by
executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

5-96
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. -ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.
Control code setting

High-speed counter
DT90052 and pulse output N/A A
control flag

Note) Refer to the “Count for reset input” in


“Count 6.3.2 “Input Mode and Count”
Hour and minute data of the Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar) are stored here. This data is
Real-Time Clock read-only data. It cannot be overwritten.
DT90053 (Clock/Calendar) A N/A
monitor (hour/minute)

Real-Time Clock The year, month, day, hour, minute, second


(Clock/Calendar) and day-of-the-week data for the Real-Time
DT90054
setting Clock(Clock/Calendar) is stored.
(minute/second) The built-in Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar)
Real-Time Clock will operate correctly through the year 2099
DT90055 (Clock/Calendar) and supports leap years. The Real-Time Clock
setting (day/hour) (Clock/Calendar) can be set by writing a value
Real-Time using a programming tool software or a
DT90056 Clock(Clock/Calendar) program that uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see
setting (year/month) example for DT90058)

A A

Real-Time Clock
(Clock/Calendar)
DT90057
setting (day-of-the-
week)

As a day of the week is not automatially set on


FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.

5-97
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
The Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) is
adjusted as follows.
When setting the Real-Time
Clock(Clock/Calendar) by program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the
time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot
be performed with any instruction other than
F0 (MV) instruction.)

<Example>
Real-Time Clock Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
DT90058 (Clock/Calendar) time the X0 turns on. A A
setting

Note) If the values of DT90054 to DT90057


are changed with the programming tool
software, the time will be set when the new
values are written. Therefore, it is
unnecessary to write to DT90058.
Serial communication Error code is sotred here when a
DT90059 N/A N/A
error code communication error occurs.

5-98
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90060
(0 to 15)
Step ladder process
DT90061
(16 to 31)
Step ladder process
DT90062
(32 to 47)
Step ladder process
DT90063
(48 to 63)
Step ladder process
DT90064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT90065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT90066
(96 to 111)
Step ladder process
DT90067 Indicates the startup condition of the step
(112 to 127)
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90068 the bit corresponding to the process number
(128 to 143)
Step ladder process turns on.
DT90069
(144 to 159)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display.
DT90070
(160 to 175)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90071
(176 to 191)
Step ladder process
DT90072
(192 to 207)
Step ladder process
DT90073
(208 to 223) A programming tool software can be used to
Step ladder process write data.
DT90074
(224 to 239)
Step ladder process
DT90075
(240 to 255)
Step ladder process
DT90076
(256 to 271)
Step ladder process
DT90077
(272 to 287)
Step ladder process
DT90078
(288 to 303)
Step ladder process
DT90079
(304 to 319)
Step ladder process
DT90080
(320 to 335)
Step ladder process
DT90081
(336 to 351)

5-99
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90082
(352 to 367)
Step ladder process
DT90083
(368 to 383)
Step ladder process
DT90084
(384 to 399)
Step ladder process
DT90085
(400 to 415)
Step ladder process
DT90086
(416 to 431) Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90087
(432 to 447) the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process turns on .
DT90088
(448 to 463)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display.
DT90089
(464 to 479)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90090
(480 to 495)
Step ladder process
DT90091
(496 to 511)
Step ladder process
DT90092
(512 to 527) A programming tool software can be used to
Step ladder process write data.
DT90093
(528 to 543)
Step ladder process
DT90094
(544 to 559)
Step ladder process
DT90095
(560 to 575)
Step ladder process
DT90096
(576 to 591)
Step ladder process
DT90097
(592 to 607)

5-100
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90098
(608 to 623)
Step ladder process
DT90099
(624 to 639)
Step ladder process
DT90100
(640 to 655)
Step ladder process
DT90101
(656 to 671)
Step ladder process
DT90102
(672 to 687)
Step ladder process
DT90103
(688 to 703)
Step ladder process
DT90104
(704 to 719)
Step ladder process
DT90105
(720 to 735)
Step ladder process
DT90106 Indicates the startup condition of the step
(736 to 751)
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90107
(752 to 767) the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process turns on “1”.
DT90108
(768 to 783)
Step ladder process
DT90109 Monitor using binary display
(784 to 799)
Step ladder process
DT90110
(800 to 815)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90111
(816 to 831)
Step ladder process
DT90112
(832 to 847)
Step ladder process
DT90113
(848 to 863)
Step ladder process
DT90114
(864 to 879) A programming tool software can be used to
Step ladder process write data.
DT90115
(880 to 895)
Step ladder process
DT90116
(896 to 911)
Step ladder process
DT90117
(912 to 927)
Step ladder process
DT90118
(928 to 943)
Step ladder process
DT90119
(944 to 959)
Step ladder process
DT90120
(960 to 975)
Step ladder process
DT90121
(976 to 991)
Step ladder process
DT90122 (992 to 999)
(higher byte is not used.)

5-101
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
DT90123 Not used - N/A N/A
COM1 SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90124 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
COM2 SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90125 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
Forced Input/Outptu
DT90126 Used by the system N/A N/A
unit No.
DT90127
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90139
The number of times the receiving operation is
DT90140
performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90141
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90142
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90143
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90144
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90145
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90146
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90147
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The number of times the receiving operation is
DT90148
performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90149
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90150
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90151 MEWNET-W0
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
PC(PLC) link 1 status A N/A
The number of times the sending operation is
DT90152 (32k type only)
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90153
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90154
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90155
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

5-102
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90156 MEWNET-W0
interval.
PC(PLC) link 0 A N/A
Area used for measurement of sending
DT90157 status
interval.
MEWNET-W0 Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90158
PC(PLC) link 1 interval.
A N/A
Status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90159
(32k type only) interval.
MEWNET-W0
DT90160 Stores the unit No. of PLC link A N/A
PLC link unit No.
MEWNET-W0
DT90161 Stores the error contents of PLC link A N/A
PLC link error flag
DT90162 to
Not used - N/A N/A
DT90169
Duplicated destination for PLC inter-link
DT90170
address
DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.
Counts how many times two or more tokens
DT90172
are detected.
DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
No. of times underfined commands have been
DT90174
received.
MEWNET-W0
No. of times sum check errors have occurred A N/A
DT90175 PLC link status
during reception.
No. of times format errors have occurred in
DT90176
received data.
No. of times transmission errors have
DT90177
occurred.
DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.
No. of times overlapping parent units have
DT90179
occurred.
DT90180 to
Not used - N/A N/A
DT90189
High-speed counter
DT90190 control flag monitor This monitors the data specified in DT90052.
for CH0
High-speed counter
DT90191 control flag monitor
for CH1
A N/A
High-speed counter
DT90192 control flag monitor
for CH2
High-speed counter
DT90193 control flag monitor
for CH3

5-103
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
DT90194
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90199
The elapsed value (32-bit data) for the high-
DT90200 High-speed
For speed counter is stored here. The value can
counter A A
CH2 be read and written by executing the F1 (DMV)
DT90201 elapsed value
instruction.

The targe value (32-bit data) of the high-speed


DT90202 counter specified by the high-speed counter
instruction is stored here. Target values have
High-speed
For been preset for the various instructions, to be
counter target A N/A
CH2 used when the high-speed counter related
value
instruction F166, F167, F171, F175 or F176 is
DT90203 executed. The value can be read by executing
F1 (DMV) instruction.

The elapsed value (32-bit data) for the high-


DT90204 High-speed
For speed counter is stored here. The value can
counter A A
CH3 be read and written by executing F1 (DMV)
DT90205 elapsed value
instruction.

The target value (32-bit data) of the high-


DT90206 speed counter specified by the high-speed
counter instruction is stored here. Target
High-speed
For values have been preset for the various
counter target A N/A
CH3 instructions, to be used when the high-speed
value
counter related instruction F166 or F167 is
DT90207 executed. The value can be read by executing
the F1 (DMV) instruction.

DT90208
to Not used N/A N/A
DT90218

5-104
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
Unit No. (Station No.)
0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8,
DT90219 selection for DT90220 to A N/A
1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16
DT90251
System regis-
DT90220
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90221
Unit ter 42 and 43
(station) System regis-
DT90222
No. 1 or 9 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90223
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90224
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90225
Unit ter 42 and 43
(station) System regis-
DT90226 The contents of the system register settings
No. 2 or 10 ter 44 and 45
partaining to the PLC inter-link function for
System regis-
DT90227 the various unit numbers are stored as
ter 46 and 47
shown below.
System regis-
DT90228
ter 40 and 41
<Example>
PLC link System regis-
DT90229 When DT90219 is 0
Unit ter 42 and 43
A N/A
(station) System regis-
DT90230
No. 3 or 11 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90231
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90232
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90233
Unit ter 42 and 43
(station) System regis-
DT90234
No. 4 or 12 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90235
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90236
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90237
Unit ter 42 and 43
(station) System regis-
DT90238
No. 5 or 13 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90239
ter 46 and 47

5-105
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
(A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Register Read- Writ-
Name Descriptions
No. ing ing
System regis-
DT90240
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90241
Unit ter 42 and 43
(station) System regis-
DT90242
No. 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45
System regis- The contents of the system register
DT90243 settings partaining to the PLC inter-link
ter 46 and 47
System regis- function for the various unit numbers are
DT90244 stored as shown below.
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90245 <Example> when DT90219 is 0.
Unit (sta- ter 42 and 43
A N/A
tion) No. 7 System regis-
DT90246
or 15 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90247
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90248
ter 40 and 41
PLC link System regis-
DT90249
Unit (sta- ter 42 and 43
tion) No. 8 System regis-
DT90250
or 16 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90251
ter 46 and 47
DT90252 Not used
DT90253 Not used
N/A N/A
DT90254 Not used
D590255 Not used
Unit No. (Station No.)
DT90256 switch monitor for COM Used by the system N/A N/A
port

5-106
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
5.1.13 Table of System Registers for FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Starting number setting for • These settings
5 1008 0 to 1024
counter are effective if the
Hold type area starting number 0 to 1024 optional backup
6 1008
setting for timer and counter battery is
Hold type area starting number installed.
7 248 0 to 256
setting for internal relays
• If no backup
Hold/ C14: 12230
Hold type area starting number battery is used, do
Non- 8 C30, C60: 0 to 32765
setting for data registers not change the
hold 1 32710
Hold or non-hold setting for step Hold/ default settings.
14 Non-hold Otherwise proper
ladder process Non-hold
functioning of
Previous value is held for a hold/non-hold
Hold/
4 leading edge detection instruction Hold
Non-hold values cannot be
(DF instruction) with MC
guaranteed.
Hold type area starting number for
10 64 0 to 64
PC(PLC) W0-0 link relays
Hold type area starting number for
Hold/ 11 128 64 to 128
PC(PLC) W0-1 link relays
Non-
Hold type area starting number for
hold 2 12 128 0 to 128
PC(PLC) W0-0 link registers
Hold type area starting number for
13 256 128 to 256
PC(PLC) W0-1 link registers
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Operation setting when an I/O
23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Dis- When a battery error
Action
abled: occurs, a self-diagnostic
on
error is not issued and
error
the ERROR/ALARM
Alarm battery error
LED does not flash.
4 (Operating setting when Disabled
Ena- When a battery error
battery error occurs)
bled: occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is issued and the
ERROR/ALARM LED
flashes.
Wait time setting for multi-frame
31 6500.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
communication
Timeout setting for SEND/RECV,
32 10000.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
RMRD/RMWT commands
Time
0: Normal scan
set- Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 350 ms: Scans once each
ting time scan
specified time interval
0
36 Expansion unit recognition time (No wait 0 to 10 s (0.1 second bit)
time)

5-107
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers used for
41 0 0 to 128 words
PC(PLC) link
PC
Starting number for link relay
(PLC) 42 0 0 to 63
transmission
link
43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
W0-0
Starting number for link data register
set- 44 0 0 to 127
transmission
ting
45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal/reverse
Maximum unit number setting for
47 16 1 to 16
MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers used for
51 0 0 to 128 words
PC PC(PLC) link
(PLC) Starting number for link relay
52 64 64 to 127
link transmission
W0-1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
set- Starting number for link data register
54 128 128 to 255
ting transmission
55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
Maximum unit number setting for
57 16 1 to 16
MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link

5-108
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-X Tr type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Decremental input (X0)
Do not set input X0 as Two-phase input (X0, X1)
high-speed counter Individual input (X0, X1)
Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
X1)
Cont- CH1: Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.
High-
roller Do not set input X1 as Incremental input (X1)
speed Decremental input (X1)
input high-speed counter
400 counter
settings Do not set input X2 as high-speed counter.
1 settings Incremental input (X2)
(HSC) (X0 to X3) CH2: Decremental input (X2)
Do not set input X2 as Two-phase input (X2, X3)
high-speed counter Individual input (X2, X3)
Incremental/decremental control input (X2,
X3)
CH3: Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X3 as Incremental input (X3)
high-speed counter Decremental input (X3)
Do not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X4)
CH4: Decremental input (X4)
Do not set input X4 as Two-phase input (X4, X5)
high-speed counter Individual input (X4, X5)
Incremental/decremental control input (X4,
X5)
X4: Normal input
Normal input Home input of pulse output CH0
CH5: Do not set input X5 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X5 as Incremental input (X5)
High- high-speed counter Decremental input (X5)
Cont-
roller speed X5: Normal input
input counter/ Normal input Home input of pulse output CH1
settings 401 pulse Do not set input X6 as high-speed counter.
2 output Incremental input (X6)
(HSC/ CH6: Decremental input (X6)
settings
PLS) Do not set input X6 as Two-phase input (X6, X7)
(X4 to X7) Individual input (X6, X7)
high-speed counter
Incremental/decremental control input (X6,
X7)
Normal input
X6:
Home input of pulse output CH2
Normal input Reset input of high-speed counter CH0
CH7: Do not set input X7 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X7 as Incremental input (X7)
high-speed counter Decremental input (X7)
Normal input
X7:
Home input of pulse output CH3
Normal input Reset input of high-speed counter CH2

5-109
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-X Tr type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Normal output (Y0, Y1)
CH0:
Pulse output (Y0, Y1)
Normal output PWM output (Y0), Normal output (Y1)
Cont- Normal output (Y2, Y3)
roller Pulse/ CH1:
Pulse output (Y2, Y3)
output PWM output Normal output PWM output (Y2), Normal output (Y3)
402
settings settings Normal output (Y4, Y5)
CH2:
(PLS/ (Y0 to Y7) Pulse output (Y4, Y5)
Normal output PWM output (Y4), Normal output (Y5)
PWM)
Normal output (Y6, Y7)
CH3:
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)
Normal output PWM output (Y6), Normal output (Y7)

Pulse catch
403 input Not set
Inter- The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch
rupt/ settings
input.
Pulse
catch Interrupt
settings 404 input Not set
The pressed contact is set for the interrupt
settings
input.

Inter- Interrupt
rupt edge setting
405 Leading edge
edge for controller
settings input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
edge.
Note1) If CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6 of the high-speed counter is set to the two-phase input, individual
input or incremental/decremental control input, the settings of CH1, CH3, CH and CH7 will be
invalid.
Note2) Only CH0 and CH2 are available for the reset input of the high-speed counter.
X6 for CH0 and X7 for CH2 can be allocated.
Note3) X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3.
When using the home return function of the pulse output, always set the home input. In that
case, X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high-speed counter.
Note4) When using the pulse output/PWM output, the controller output settings must be specified.
The output that has been set to the pulse output/PWM output cannot be used as the normal
output.
Note5) If the same input has been set to the high-speed, pulse catch and interrupt input simultaneously,
the following precedence order is effective:
[High-speed counter] → [Pulse catch] → [Interrupt input]

5-110
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com
FP-X Ry type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Do not set input X100 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X100, X101)
Two-phase input (X100, X101), Reset input
(X102)
Incremental input (X100)
CH8: Incremental input (X100), Reset input (X102)
Do not set Decremental input (X100)
input X100 as Decremental input (X100), Reset input (X102)
High-speed high-speed Incremental/decremental input (X100, X101)
Incremental/decremental input (X100, X101),
counter counter
Reset input (X102)
settings Incremental/decremental control input (X100,
400 (X100 to X102) X101)
Incremental/decremental control input (X100,
X101), Reset input (X102)
CH9: Do not set input X101 as high-speed counter.
Do not set Incremental input (X101)
input X101 as Incremental input (X101), Reset input (X102)
high-speed Decremental input (X101)
Decremental input (X101), Reset input (X102)
counter
Pulse output CH0: Normal output (Y100, Y101)
Pulse I/O settings Normal Pulse output (Y100, Y101)
cassette PWM output (Y100), Normal output (Y101)
(Y100 to Y101) output
settings
Do not set input X200 as high-speed counter.
(HSC/ Two-phase input (X200, X201)
PLS) Two-phase
input (X200, X201), Reset input (X202)
Incremental input (X200)
CHA: Incremental input (X200), Reset input (X202)
Do not set Decremental input (X202)
input X200 as Decremental input (X202), Reset input (X202)
High-speed high-speed Incremental/decremental input (X200, X201)
Incremental/decremental input (X200, X201),
counter counter
Reset input (X202)
settings Incremental/decremental control
401 (X200 to X202) (X200, X201)
Incremental/decremental control
(X200, X201), Reset input (X202)
CHB: Does not set input X201 as high-speed
Do not set counter.
Incremental input (X201)
input X201 as Incremental input (X201), Reset input (X202)
high-speed Decremental input (X201)
counter Decremental input (X201), Reset input (X202)
Pulse output CH1: Normal output (Y200, Y201)
settings Normal Pulse output (Y200, Y201)
(Y200 to Y201) output PWM output (Y200), Normal output (Y201)

5-111
Buy: www.ValinOnline.com | Phone 844-385-3099 | Email: CustomerService@valin.com

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy